Owner’s Manual
2015 MKS
September 2014
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Lincoln MKS
Litho in U.S.A.
FA5J 19A321 AA
2015 MKS Owner’s Manual
lincolnowner.com lincolncanada.com
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design
or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any
form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2014
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20140828181351
Introduction
About This Manual................................................7
Symbols Glossary..................................................7
Data Recording.......................................................9
California Proposition 65...................................11
Perchlorate..............................................................11
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services........11
Replacement Parts Recommendation.........11
Special Notices.....................................................12
Mobile Communications Equipment...........12
Export Unique Options......................................13
Child Safety
General Information...........................................14
Installing Child Seats..........................................16
Booster Seats........................................................21
Child Seat Positioning.......................................24
Child Safety Locks..............................................25
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation........................................27
Fastening the Safety Belts..............................28
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.....................30
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime...................................................................31
Safety Belt Minder..............................................32
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance.....................................................33
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™...............................35
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation.......................................36
Driver and Passenger Airbags.........................37
Front Passenger Sensing System.................38
Side Airbags.........................................................40
Safety Canopy™..................................................41
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator............43
Airbag Disposal...................................................44
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies......................................................45
Remote Control...................................................46
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control................................................................48
MyKey™
Principle of Operation.......................................50
Creating a MyKey.................................................51
Clearing All MyKeys.............................................51
Checking MyKey System Status....................53
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..............................................................54
MyKey Troubleshooting....................................54
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.....................................56
Keyless Entry........................................................59
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release................................................................61
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System.............................63
Anti-Theft Alarm................................................64
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........................65
Audio Control.......................................................65
Voice Control........................................................66
Cruise Control......................................................66
Information Display Control............................67
Heated Steering Wheel....................................67
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals.........................................68
1
MKS (), enUSA
Table of Contents
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.............................................69
Autowipers............................................................69
Windshield Washers..........................................70
Lighting
Lighting Control....................................................71
Autolamps..............................................................71
Instrument Lighting Dimmer...........................72
Headlamp Exit Delay.........................................73
Daytime Running Lamps..................................73
Automatic High Beam Control.......................74
Front Fog Lamps.................................................75
Adaptive Headlamps.........................................75
Direction Indicators............................................76
Interior Lamps......................................................76
Ambient Lighting.................................................77
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows...................................................78
Exterior Mirrors.....................................................79
Interior Mirror.......................................................80
Sun Visors...............................................................81
Sun Shades............................................................81
Moonroof................................................................81
Instrument Cluster
Gauges....................................................................83
Warning Lamps and Indicators.....................84
Audible Warnings and Indicators.................86
Information Displays
General Information..........................................88
Information Messages......................................94
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control...........................105
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.............................................................106
Heated Windows and Mirrors.......................107
Cabin Air Filter....................................................108
Remote Start......................................................108
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position......................109
Head Restraints.................................................109
Power Seats..........................................................111
Memory Function...............................................114
Climate Controlled Seats................................115
Rear Seat Armrest..............................................117
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener.....................119
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.....................................123
Storage Compartments
Center Console...................................................125
Overhead Console.............................................125
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information.........................................126
Keyless Starting.................................................126
Starting a Gasoline Engine.............................127
Engine Block Heater.........................................129
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions.............................................131
Fuel Quality..........................................................132
Running Out of Fuel..........................................132
Refueling...............................................................134
Fuel Consumption............................................135
Emission Control System...............................136
2
MKS (), enUSA
Table of Contents
Transmission
Automatic Transmission................................139
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive......................................142
Brakes
General Information.........................................147
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................147
Parking Brake......................................................148
Hill Start Assist..................................................148
Traction Control
Principle of Operation.....................................150
Using Traction Control....................................150
Stability Control
Principle of Operation.......................................151
Using Stability Control....................................152
Parking Aids
Parking Aid...........................................................153
Active Park Assist..............................................155
Rear View Camera............................................160
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.....................................163
Using Cruise Control........................................163
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.....................164
Driving Aids
Driver Alert.............................................................171
Lane Keeping System.......................................172
Blind Spot Information System...................176
Steering..................................................................181
Collision Warning System..............................182
Drive Control.......................................................185
Load Carrying
Load Limit............................................................187
Towing
Towing a Trailer..................................................198
Recommended Towing Weights.................199
Essential Towing Checks..............................200
Transporting the Vehicle...............................202
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels..........202
Driving Hints
Breaking-In.........................................................204
Economical Driving.........................................204
Driving Through Water...................................204
Floor Mats...........................................................205
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance.......................................207
Hazard Warning Flashers..............................208
Fuel Shutoff.......................................................208
Jump Starting the Vehicle............................209
Post-Crash Alert System.................................211
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need.....................212
In California (U.S. Only)..................................213
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)...........................214
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)................................................215
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..............................................................215
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature..........................................................216
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)........217
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...................................................................217
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart................................218
3
MKS (), enUSA
Table of Contents
Changing a Fuse................................................232
Maintenance
General Information........................................234
Opening and Closing the Hood...................234
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.....................................................236
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L........................238
Engine Oil Dipstick...........................................239
Engine Oil Check...............................................239
Oil Change Indicator Reset...........................240
Engine Coolant Check....................................240
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check.......244
Brake Fluid Check.............................................247
Power Steering Fluid Check..........................247
Washer Fluid Check........................................248
Fuel Filter.............................................................248
Changing the 12V Battery..............................248
Checking the Wiper Blades..........................250
Changing the Wiper Blades.........................250
Adjusting the Headlamps..............................251
Changing a Bulb................................................252
Bulb Specification Chart................................253
Changing the Engine Air Filter.....................255
Vehicle Care
General Information........................................257
Cleaning Products............................................257
Cleaning the Exterior.......................................257
Waxing..................................................................258
Cleaning the Engine........................................258
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...............................................................259
Cleaning the Interior........................................259
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens............................260
Cleaning Leather Seats.................................260
Repairing Minor Paint Damage....................261
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.............................261
Vehicle Storage.................................................262
Wheels and Tires
Tire Care..............................................................264
Using Snow Chains..........................................279
Tire Pressure Monitoring System................279
Changing a Road Wheel................................283
Technical Specifications...............................288
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications.....................................290
Motorcraft Parts................................................291
Vehicle Identification Number......................291
Vehicle Certification Label............................292
Transmission Code Designation.................293
Technical Specifications...............................294
Audio System
General Information........................................299
Audio Unit...........................................................300
Media Hub...........................................................302
MyLincoln Touch™
General Information........................................303
Settings.................................................................313
Entertainment...................................................325
Phone...................................................................344
Information..........................................................351
Climate................................................................360
Navigation...........................................................364
Accessories
Accessories.........................................................373
Appendices
End User License Agreement.......................375
4
MKS (), enUSA
Table of Contents
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................390
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information............392
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...............396
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..................................................399
Scheduled Maintenance Record................402
5
MKS (), enUSA
Table of Contents
6
MKS (), enUSA
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product features
and options available throughout the range of
available models, sometimes even before they
are generally available. It may describe options
not fitted to your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different models,
so may appear different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in
line with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
7
MKS (), enUSA
Introduction
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
8
MKS (), enUSA
Introduction
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your vehicle,
Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and
service and repair facilities may access or
share among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when diagnosing
or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, when
your vehicle is in for service or repair, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them data for vehicle improvement
purposes. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you
choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health
Report, you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used for
any purpose. See MyLincoln Touch™ (page
303).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
9
MKS (), enUSA
Introduction
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to the
vehicle or the event data recorder. Ford
Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the
information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the occupants
to assist 911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature. See
MyLincoln Touch™ (page 303).
10
MKS (), enUSA
Introduction
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that
you request. If you do not want Ford or
its vendors to receive this information,
do not activate the service. For more
information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See
MyLincoln Touch™ (page 303).
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine exhaust,
certain vehicle components, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, safety belt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal. For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. If you have
financed or leased your vehicle through
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services, thank
you for your business.
For your convenience we offer a number of
ways to contact us, as well as help manage
your account.
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
For more information regarding Lincoln
Automotive Financial Services, as well as
access Account Manager, please go to
www.LincolnAFS.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance
or repair. You can clearly identify genuine
Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the
Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the
parts or their packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service is
to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’ s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
11
MKS (), enUSA
Introduction
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate these parts deliver the intended level
of protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level of
protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Ford Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
Failure to follow the specific warnings
and instructions could result in personal
injury. See Supplementary
Restraints System (page 36).
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active passenger
airbag.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
12
MKS (), enUSA
Introduction
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for Export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
13
MKS (), enUSA
Introduction
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is secured
properly in a device that is appropriate
for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be bought separately
from your vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
WARNINGS
All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints
are based on probable child height, age
and weight thresholds from National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration and
other safety organizations, or are the
minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) and consult your pediatrician to
make sure your child seat is appropriate for
your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in your vehicle. To locate
a child seat fitting station and CPST, contact
the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or go
to http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry
WARNINGS
of transportation, locate your local St. John
Ambulance office by searching for St. John
Ambulance on the internet, or Transport
Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of
people or animals to these high temperatures
for even a short time can cause death or
serious heat-related injuries, including brain
damage. Small children are particularly at
risk.
14
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seat back upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
15
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80
pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position. See Front Passenger
Sensing System (page 38).
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Never place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Children 12 and under should be
properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a child
restraint, and depending on the child
restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child seat and
the release button, to prevent accidental
unbuckling.
16
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child seat with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a
forward facing child seat, the steps are the
same for installing a rear facing child seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, pull down on
the shoulder belt and then grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
17
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or kneeling
on the child restraint while pulling up on
the shoulder belt in order to force slack
from the belt. This is necessary to remove
the remaining slack that will exist once
the extra weight of the child is added to
the child restraint. It also helps to achieve
the proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will provide extra help
to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5
centimeters) of movement for proper
installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St.
John Ambulance office for referral to a
Certified Passenger Seat Technician.
18
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats to
the same anchor. In a collision, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments and
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Depending on where you secure a child
restraint, and depending on the child
restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where seat back and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use safety belts to
attach the child seat, however the safety belt
can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child seat.
E173197
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating positions
marked with the child seat symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the cushion
and seatback below the symbols as shown.
Follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child seat
with LATCH attachments. Follow the
instructions on attaching child safety seats
with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
seat only to the anchors shown.
19
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
Child Seat Positioning for LATCH Lower
Anchors
All the LATCH lower anchors are equally
spaced, 11 inches (28 centimeters) apart,
allowing for the following child seat
positioning:
• If a single child seat is installed using the
LATCH lower anchors, it can be installed
at any rear seating position.
• If two child safety seats are installed
using the LATCH lower anchors, they
must be placed in the outboard seating
positions only.
• If three child safety seats are installed,
you can install two using the LATCH
lower anchors by placing them in each
outboard seating position and the third
in the center using the lap and shoulder
belt, OR you can use the LATCH lower
anchors for the center child safety seat
and the lap and shoulder belts for the
other two child safety seats in the
outboard positions. Use the tether
anchors if applicable.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety
belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be
attached first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap
afterward, if included with the child seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child
safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point
called the top tether anchor. Tether straps
are available as an accessory for many older
safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat
for information about ordering a tether strap,
or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the
appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been installed
using either the safety belt, the lower anchors
of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether
strap enough to lift the child seat off your
vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated
in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the
child seat just touching your vehicle seat gives
the best protection in a severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat.
20
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
E173198
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected
seating position, then open the tether
anchor cover.
E173199
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
E173200
4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If your child restraint system is equipped with
a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also
recommends its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body
and may increase the risk of injury or death
in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80
pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100
pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer). Many
state and provincial laws require that children
use approved booster seats until they reach
age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45
meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
21
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable
shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating
position has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat may place
your child's head (as measured at the tops
of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or
consider using a high back booster seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
22
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
E142596
E142597
23
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Never place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position,
properly restrain the largest child in the front
seat.
WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the instructions
and warnings provided by the
manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age, or
weight or does not properly fit the child may
increase the risk of serious injury or death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect
the child from injury in a crash, which may
result in serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Never use pillows, books, or towels to
boost a child. They can slide around
and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects may
become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body
and may increase the risk of injury or death
in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
24
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by XCombined weight
of child and child
seat
Restraint Type
Safety belt onlySafety belt and
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
Safety belt and top
tether anchor
LATCH (lower
anchors only)
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
XXUp to 65 lb (29 kg)Rear facing child
seat
XOver 65 lb (29 kg)Rear facing child
seat
XXXUp to 65 lb (29 kg)Forward facing
child seat
XXOver 65 lb (29 kg)Forward facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against
the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It
may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 109).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
25
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the rear
edge of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise
to unlock.
26
MKS (), enUSA
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your seat
back upright and the lap belt snug and
low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure
children sit where they can be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect
the child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety
belt properly.
WARNINGS
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used as
a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt
under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt
around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3)
Never use a single belt for more than one
person.
When possible, all children 12 years old
and under should be properly restrained
in a rear seating position. Failure to
follow this could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather; they could burn a small
child. Check seat covers and buckles before
you place a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in your vehicle have lap
and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of
the vehicle should always properly wear their
safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• lap and shoulder safety belts.
• shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety belt).
• height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• belt tension sensor at the front outboard
passenger seating position.
• Safety belt warning light and chime.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
27
MKS (), enUSA
Safety Belts
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten the
safety belts when activated. In frontal and
near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. The pretensioners may
also activate when a side curtain airbag is
deployed.
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button and
remove the tongue from the buckle.
E142589
When in use, the rear safety belts should be
placed in the belt guides on the outboard
seatbacks.
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The shoulder
portion of the safety belt should be
positioned across the chest. Pregnant women
should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
28
MKS (), enUSA
Safety Belts
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should be
positioned low across the hips below the
belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow.
The shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety belt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the automatic
locking retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all safety
belts should be checked for proper function.
WARNINGS
The belt and retractor assembly must
be replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized
dealer. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of locking
mode, and the front outboard passenger and
rear seat safety belts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination safety belts will lock to help
reduce forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this
occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull
webbing out again in a slow and controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed in
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See Child Safety (page
14).
29
MKS (), enUSA
Safety Belts
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
turn on the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING
Do not use extensions to change the fit
of the shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, you can obtain a safety belt
extension assembly from an authorized
dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is on a label
located either at the end of the webbing or
on the retractor behind the trim. Also, use the
safety belt extension only if the safety belt is
too short for you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height adjusters
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the
safety belt properly could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt and increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
E146191
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
30
MKS (), enUSA
Safety Belts
2. Release the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is locked
in place.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning
chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is
turned to the on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
31
MKS (), enUSA
Safety Belts
SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have a
front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front
passenger sensing system to determine if a
front seat passenger is present and therefore
potentially in need of a warning. To avoid
activating the Belt-Minder feature for objects
you place in the front passenger seat, only
the front seat passengers receive warnings
as determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings
for about five minutes) for one passenger
(driver or front passenger), the other
passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder
feature to turn on.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before you
switch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch
the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before
your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about
1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
32
MKS (), enUSA
Safety Belts
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system activated
for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger warnings
switch on and off independently. When you
perform this procedure for one seating
position, do not buckle the other position as
this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P) or neutral
(N).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY
BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts
to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts.
Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat back (if
equipped), rear inflatable safety belts (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a collision. Read
the child restraint manufacturer's instructions
for additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a collision be replaced. However,
if the collision was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is noted.
33
MKS (), enUSA
Safety Belts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists
of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, safety belt pretensioners, front
safety belt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
safety belt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
35
MKS (), enUSA
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently,
and the risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years old
and under in the back seat and always
properly use appropriate child
restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can result
in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Never place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components get
hot after inflation. To reduce the risk of
injury, do not touch them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper body
injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there
is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag
deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds
(for example, baking soda) that result from
the combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide
may be present which may irritate the skin
and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
36
MKS (), enUSA
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can result
in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation
area may cause those objects to be propelled
by the airbag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Never place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 43).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
a minimum distance of at least 10
inches (25 centimeters) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
37
MKS (), enUSA
Supplementary Restraints System
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Never place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under should
be properly restrained in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seat back reclined too far can
take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against
your seat back, with your feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system which could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are part
of the front passenger’s seat and safety belt
to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
passenger’ s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
E173214
The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator that will
illuminate indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled).
The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate
for a short period of time when the ignition is
first turned on to confirm it is functional.
38
MKS (), enUSA
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing
infant seat, a forward-facing child restraint,
or a booster seat is detected. Even with this
technology, parents are strongly encouraged
to always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger
front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag
when the passenger seat is empty.
• When the front passenger sensing system
disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system
enables the front passenger frontal airbag
(may inflate), the passenger airbag status
indicator will illuminate the ON lamp and
remain illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger’ s seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seat back in the full upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised
to ride in the rear seat.
39
MKS (), enUSA
Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status indicatorOccupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may be
disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment
injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 43).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center. See Getting the
Services You Need (page 212).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag cover,
on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
40
MKS (), enUSA
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not use accessory seat covers. The
use of accessory seat covers may
prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an
accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat
cover on a seat containing an airbag as
you could be seriously injured or killed.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The side
airbag system (including the seat)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard
side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the
side affected by the crash will be inflated.
The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants
in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel indicating
that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver and
front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 43).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side
airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner at
the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
curtain airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the headliner.
41
MKS (), enUSA
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner
on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle including
the driver should always wear their
safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain
airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct
or place objects in the deployment path
of the curtain airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including
the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) must
be inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by
the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is
mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front and
rear side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
• The crash sensors and monitoring system
have a readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
43).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
42
MKS (), enUSA
Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to the
front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system, increasing
the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end
of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module. The
restraints control module deploys (activates)
the front safety belt pretensioners, driver
airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted side
airbags and the Safety Canopy. Based on the
type of crash (frontal impact or side impact),
the restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. Routine maintenance of
the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or stay
lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the event
of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to deploy
a safety device.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather,
it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes and in
rollovers.
43
MKS (), enUSA
Supplementary Restraints System
• The design of the side airbags is to inflate
in certain side impact crashes. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. The Safety Canopy may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
44
MKS (), enUSA
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment. The term IC before
the radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of the
following could cause a decrease in operating
range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters, such
as amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems may operate on the same
frequency as your remote control. If other
transmitters are operating on those
frequencies, you may not be able to use your
remote control. Using your remote control
near some types of electronic equipment,
such as USB devices, computers or cell
phones can interfere with remote operation.
Operating your remote control near metal or
metallic-finished purses, bags or clothing can
interfere with remote operation. You can lock
and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of the front exterior
door handle.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the mechanical
key blade in your intelligent access key to
open the driver door in this situation. See
Remote Control (page 46).
45
MKS (), enUSA
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
E173598
Your intelligent access key operates the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door.
E173599
Slide the release on the back of the remote
control to release the mechanical key blade,
and then pull the blade out.
E173600
Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came with
a security tag that provides important vehicle
key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of the
circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
E173599
1. Remove the mechanical key blade from
the transmitter.
46
MKS (), enUSA
Keys and Remote Controls
E173601
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing.
E173602
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Install a new batteries with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure that it is fully in the housing.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the
transmitter and install the mechanical
key blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds. The horn will sound and
the turn signals will flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to deactivate.
Remote Start
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
is low on fuel.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from outside the vehicle. The transmitter has
an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can
be configured to operate when the vehicle is
remote started. See Remote Start (page
108). A manual climate control system will
run at the setting it was set to when you
switched the vehicle off.
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
• the ignition is on
• the alarm system is triggered
• you disable the feature
• the hood is open
• the transmission is not in P
• the vehicle battery voltage is too low
• the service engine soon light is on.
47
MKS (), enUSA
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle will
not remote start if you do not follow this
sequence.
E138626
The tag with your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps will flash twice.
The horn will sound if the system fails to
start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start will
run the blower fan at a slower speed to
reduce noise. It can be switched on or off in
the information display. See General
Information (page 88).
Note: If the vehicle has been remote started
with an integrated keyhead transmitter, you
must switch the ignition on before driving your
vehicle. With an intelligent access transmitter,
you must press the START/STOP button on
the instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows will not work during the
remote start and the radio will not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the
vehicle will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start duration. If you programmed
the duration to last 10 minutes, the second
10 minutes will begin after what is left of the
first activation time. For example, if the
vehicle had been running from the first
remote start for five minutes, the vehicle will
continue to run now for a total of 15 minutes.
You can extend the remote start up to a
maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The parking
lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the running
vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display. See
General Information (page 88).
Memory Feature
You can recall the positions of the memory
seat, outside mirrors, steering column and
power pedal positions (if equipped) with your
intelligent access key if it is linked to a pre-set
position. See Memory Function (page 114).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can be
purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 63).
48
MKS (), enUSA
Keys and Remote Controls
To re-program the passive anti-theft system
see an authorized dealer.
49
MKS (), enUSA
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be activated
with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or admin
keys. These can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles with push-button start,
when both a MyKey and an admin remote
transmitter are present, the admin remote
transmitter will be recognized by the vehicle
while switching the ignition on to start the
vehicle.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed by
an admin key user:
• Seat belt reminder or Belt Minder. You
cannot disable this feature. The audio
system will mute when the front seat
passengers' safety belts are not fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low-fuel warning
activates earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your
vehicle, are forced on: parking aid, blind
spot information system (BLIS) with
cross traffic alert, lane departure warning
and forward collision warning system or
active city-stop.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure certain
MyKey settings when you first create a MyKey
and before you recycle the key or restart the
vehicle. You can also change the settings
afterward with an admin key.
• A vehicle speed limit can be set. Warnings
will be shown in the display followed by
an audible tone when your vehicle
reaches the set speed. You cannot
override the set speed by fully depressing
the accelerator pedal or by setting cruise
control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit
to a limit that will prevent the driver
from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
50
MKS (), enUSA
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed minders can be set.
Once you select a speed, it will be shown
in the display, followed by an audible tone
when the preselected vehicle speed is
exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%.
A message will be shown in the display
when you attempt to exceed the limited
volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or
compensated automatic volume control
will be disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is selected,
you will not be able to turn off Advance
Trac or traction control (if your vehicle is
equipped with this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into the
ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with a
push-button start, place the intelligent
access key fob into the backup slot. The
location of your backup slot is in another
chapter. See Starting and Stopping the
Engine (page 126).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information
display controls, and select Settings then
MyKey by pressing OK or the > button.
4. Press OK or the > button to select Create
MyKey.
5. When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label this
key as a MyKey. The key will be restricted at
the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure you
label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.
2. Access the main menu on the information
display controls, and select Settings,
then MyKey by pressing OK or > button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to a feature.
4. Press OK or > to make a selection.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key cycle
as you created the MyKey. Once you have
switched the vehicle off, however, you will
need an admin key to change or clear your
MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey settings
using the information display control on the
steering wheel. See Information Displays
(page 88).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key or
fob.
51
MKS (), enUSA
MyKey™
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.Clear MyKey
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.
52
MKS (), enUSA
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 88).
To find information on a programed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance
is by using an admin key to clear your MyKey. If the distance does not accumulate as expected,
then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many
MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine how
many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been
programed.
{0} Admin Keys
53
MKS (), enUSA
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
· The key or fob used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.I cannot create a MyKey.
· The key or fob used to start the vehicle is the only admin key (there always has to be at least one
admin key).
· Vehicles with push-button start: The intelligent access key fob is not positioned correctly next to
the steering column. See Keyless Starting (page 126).
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin
privileges. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 54).
· The key or fob used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.I cannot program the configurable
settings. · No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 51).
· The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin
privileges. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 54).
· The key or fob used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 51).
· The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin
privileges. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 54).
Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 63).I lost a key
54
MKS (), enUSA
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
· The vehicle has a remote start system that is recognized as an admin key. Clear all MyKeys by using
the remote start. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 54).
I accidentally programmed all keys as
MyKeys.
· The vehicle's system does not recognize any programmed MyKeys. See Creating a MyKey (page
51).
· An unknown key or fob has been created as a MyKey.MyKey total includes one additional key.
· The vehicle has a remote start system. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page
54).
· An unknown key or fob has been programmed to the vehicle as an admin key.Admin key total includes one additional
key. · The vehicle has a remote start system. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page
54).
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
· An admin fob is present at vehicle start.No MyKey functions with the Intelligent
Access key. · No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 51).
55
MKS (), enUSA
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or
the remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
UnlockA
LockB
Remote Control
You can use the remote control anytime your
vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signals
will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one
press of the button. The turn signals will flash
twice to indicate the unlocking mode was
changed. The unlocking mode will be applied
to the remote control, keyless entry keypad
and intelligent access.
Intelligent access at the driver door will
unlock all doors when two-stage unlocking
is disabled.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all the
doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors will lock again, the horn will sound and
the turn signals will illuminate if all the doors
and the luggage compartment are closed.
Note: If any door or the luggage compartment
is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with
an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
sounds twice and the lamps will not flash.
Opening the Luggage Compartment
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the luggage compartment.
Make sure to close and latch the luggage
compartment before driving your vehicle. An
unlatched luggage compartment may cause
objects to fall out or block your view.
Activating Intelligent Access
You must have the intelligent access key
within 3 feet (1 meter) of your vehicle.
At the Front Doors
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and
open the door.
56
MKS (), enUSA
Locks
E173603
Press and hold the door handle lock sensor
to lock your vehicle. To avoid unlocking the
door inadvertently, make sure to only touch
the lock sensor and not other areas of the
door handle.
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean to
avoid issues with operation.
At the Luggage Compartment
Press the exterior release button hidden near
the license plate.
Smart Unlocks
This feature helps to prevent you from
unintentionally locking your intelligent access
key inside your vehicle’s passenger
compartment or rear cargo area.
When you lock your vehicle using the driver
or passenger power door lock control (with
the door open, vehicle park (P) and ignition
off), after you close the door your vehicle will
search for an intelligent access key in the
passenger compartment. If an intelligent
access key is found inside your vehicle, all of
the doors will immediately unlock and the
horn will sound, indicating that the intelligent
access key is inside.
In order to override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle, you can lock your
vehicle after all doors are closed by using the
keyless entry keypad, pressing the lock
button on another intelligent access key or
touching the locking area on the handle with
another intelligent access key in your hand.
See Keyless Entry (page 59).
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission is
not in park (P).
Autolock Feature (If Enabled)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors
when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle attains a speed greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is 9
mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle then attains a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock Feature (If Enabled)
The autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are closed,
and your vehicle has been in motion at a
speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
• Your vehicle has then come to a stop and
you switch the ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
57
MKS (), enUSA
Locks
Note: The doors will not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you switch
the ignition off and before you open the driver
door.
Enabling or Disabling
Note: You can enable or disable the autolock
and autounlock features independently of
each other.
You can enable or disable these features in
the information display or your authorized
dealer can do it for you. See General
Information (page 88).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior lamps
will illuminate when you unlock the doors
with the remote entry system.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the
lights if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• After 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior dome lamps, parking lamps and
puddle lamps illuminate when all doors are
closed and the ignition is turned off.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds elapse.
• You press the START/STOP button.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, dome lamps
or headlamps on, the battery saver will shut
them off 10 minutes after you switch the
ignition off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave your vehicle in the run ignition
state, it will shut off once it detects a certain
amount of battery drain or after 45 minutes.
Luggage Compartment Release
From Inside Your Vehicle
Press the button located on the instrument
panel.
E173604
From Outside Your Vehicle
• Unlock the trunk with the remote control
or power door lock control. The trunk
unlocks when you press the release
button if the intelligent access transmitter
is within 3 feet (1 meter) of the trunk.
• Press the release button located near the
license plate.
58
MKS (), enUSA
Locks
E173605
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver window.
It is invisible until touched and then it lights
up so you can see and touch the appropriate
buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast on
the keypad, the unlock function may not work.
Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Open the luggage compartment.
• Recall memory features.
• Enable or disable the autolock and
autounlock.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set 5-digit entry code. The code is
located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also create up to five of your
own 5-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. For memory recall feature, enter the sixth
digit 1·2 to store driver 1 settings or 3·4to
store driver 2 settings.
5. The doors will lock and then unlock to
confirm that programming is complete.
59
MKS (), enUSA
Locks
Note: Pressing 5·6, 7·8, or 9·0 keypad numbers
as a sixth digit will not recall a driver memory
setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be
associated with a memory setting.
You may also program a personal entry code
through the MyLincoln Touch system. See
Settings (page 313).
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if you
have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only
the factory-set 5–digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode if
you enter the wrong code seven times (35
consecutive button presses). This mode
disables the keypad for one minute and the
keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the remote
control.
• Switching the ignition on.
• Unlocking your vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The interior
lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking feature. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 56).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time
(with the driver door closed). You do not
need to enter the keypad code first.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You will need to have two programmed
intelligent access keys for this procedure.
To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
E173591
1. Place the first programmed key in the
backup slot beneath the glovebox door.
The key ring must be at the top with the
buttons facing toward the rear.
2. Press the START/STOP button once
and wait a few seconds.
60
MKS (), enUSA
Locks
3. Press the START/STOP button again
and remove the key.
4. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot, then press the
START/STOP button.
The factory-set code will appear in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNINGS
Keep vehicle doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep keys
and remote transmitters out of a child’s
reach. Unsupervised children could lock
themselves in the trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
WARNINGS
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the luggage
compartment or vehicle interior can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release
handle that provides a means of escape for
children and adults if they become locked
inside the luggage compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with
the operation and location of the release
handle.
E144403
The handle is located inside the luggage
compartment either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or near the tail
lamps. It is composed of a material that will
glow for hours in darkness following brief
exposure to ambient light.
61
MKS (), enUSA
Locks
Pull the handle and push up on the luggage
compartment door (lid) to open from within
the luggage compartment.
62
MKS (), enUSA
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or
a second coded key on the same key chain
may cause vehicle starting problems if they
are too close to the key when starting your
vehicle. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting your vehicle.
Switch the ignition off, move all objects on the
key chain away from the coded key and restart
your vehicle if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in
your vehicle. Always take your keys and lock
all doors when leaving your vehicle. The
system is an engine immobilization system. It
will not start without a coded key programmed
to your vehicle. If you use the wrong key, a
message may appear in the information
display.
SecuriLock
The system helps prevent your vehicle from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the wrong
key may prevent your vehicle from starting.
A message may appear in the information
display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with a
correctly coded key, it is not operating
properly. A message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after
switching the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms your vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two
intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or
stolen and you do not have an extra coded
key, you will need to have your vehicle towed
to an authorized dealer. You need to erase
the key codes from your vehicle and program
new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. Contact your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
intelligent access keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously programmed
intelligent access keys inside your vehicle and
the new unprogrammed intelligent access
keys readily accessible. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the spare key
programmed if two previously programmed
keys are not available.
63
MKS (), enUSA
Security
Make sure that your vehicle is off before
beginning this procedure. Make sure that you
close all the doors before beginning and that
they remain closed throughout the procedure.
Perform all steps within 30 seconds of
starting the sequence. Stop and wait for at
least one minute before starting again if you
perform any steps out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
E173591
1. Place the first programmed key in the
backup slot beneath the glovebox door,
then press the push button ignition
switch.
2. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
3. Remove the intelligent access key.
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot. Press the push button
ignition switch.
5. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
6. Remove the intelligent access key.
7. Place the unprogrammed intelligent
access key in the backup slot and press
the push button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Verify the
remote control functions operate and your
vehicle starts with the new intelligent access
key.
If programming was not successful, wait 10
seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If you
are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. Anyone opening any
door, the luggage compartment or the hood
without using a valid key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad will set off the alarm.
The turn signal lamps will flash and sound
the horn up to a total of 10 times.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in the ignition. Electronically lock the
vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
To disarm the alarm do any of the following:
• Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-arm period.
• Unlock the doors with the keyless entry
pad.
• Press the unlock button on the remote
control.
• Enter the vehicle using intelligent access.
• Press the panic button on the remote
control. The alarm system remains
armed, but the horn and turn indicators
shut off.
Note: If the driver door is unlocked with a key,
a tone will sound when you open the door and
a message will appear in the information
display. You will have 12 seconds to disarm
the alarm using any of the actions above,
otherwise the alarm goes off.
64
MKS (), enUSA
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 109).
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the
control.
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Press the steering column control again
after encountering the new stopping
position.
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the column position.
A new stopping position is set. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
will stop just short of the end of the column
position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 114).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation. The
column responds to the adjustment control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If Equipped)
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
column will move to the full up position to
allow extra room to exit your vehicle. The
column will return to the previous setting
when you switch the ignition on. You can
enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 88).
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions with
the control:
65
MKS (), enUSA
Steering Wheel
E173608
C
A
B
Seek up and down or nextA
MediaB
Volume up or downC
MuteD
Seek and Media
Press the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset
• play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band
• seek through a track.
Press the media button repeatedly to:
• scroll through available audio modes.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E173609
V
Phone modeA
Voice recognitionB
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 303).
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E173610
Type 2
E173611
66
MKS (), enUSA
Steering Wheel
See Cruise Control (page 163).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E173617
See Information Displays (page 88).
Cluster Display Control Features
E173616
Use this control to access some of the
MyLincoln Touch features in the information
display. Navigate through the screen and
press OK to select. See MyLincoln Touch™
(page 303).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 303).
67
MKS (), enUSA
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the controls while your feet
are on the accelerator and brake pedals
and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 114).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
68
MKS (), enUSA
Pedals (If Equipped)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
E173262
Rotate the end of the control away from you
to increase the speed of the wipers. Rotate
toward you to decrease the speed of the
wipers.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the windshield
wipers before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If that
does not resolve the issue, install new wiper
blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
E173262
Adjust the rotary control to increase or
decrease the sensitivity of the rain sensor. On
the lowest sensitivity setting, the wipers turn
on when there is a large amount of moisture
on the windshield. On the highest sensitivity
setting, the wipers turn on when there is a
small amount of moisture on the windshield.
Autowipers uses a rain sensor, located near
the interior mirror. The rain sensor monitors
the amount of moisture on the windshield. It
turns on the wipers and adjusts the wiper
speed by the amount of moisture that the
sensor detects on the windshield. You can
turn this feature on and off in the information
display. See General Information (page
88).
Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The
rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area around
the mirror is dirty, then the wipers may
operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the windshield
wipers before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If that
does not resolve the issue, install new wiper
blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low beam
headlamps will turn on automatically when
the rain sensor turns on the windshield wipers
continuously.
69
MKS (), enUSA
Wipers and Washers
Note: Wet or winter driving conditions with
ice, snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
In these conditions, you can do the following
to help keep your windshield clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Adjust the rotary control to normal or
high-speed wipe.
• Switch off the autowipers.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E173263
Press the end of the stalk to operate the
washer.
• A brief press causes a single wipe without
washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers
to swipe three times with washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will operate the
wipers and washer fluid for a short time.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing to clear any remaining washer fluid.
This feature can be switched on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 88).
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the
washer pump to overheat.
70
MKS (), enUSA
Wipers and Washers
LIGHTING CONTROL
E173257
A
OffA
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps
B
HeadlampsC
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch the
high beams on.
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high
beams off.
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Pull the lever toward you slightly and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Make sure the headlamps are switched
to auto or on, as appropriate, during all low
visibility conditions. Failure to do so may
result in a crash.
71
MKS (), enUSA
Lighting
E173258
A
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps automatically turn
on in low light situations or when the wipers
activate.
If equipped, the following also activate when
the lighting control is in the autolamps
position and you switch them on in the
information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
The headlamps remain on for a period of time
after you switch the ignition off. Use the
information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on. See Information Displays (page 88).
Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps
position, you cannot switch the high beam
headlamps on until the autolamps system
turns the low beam headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after you
switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers
on, the headlamps will automatically turn on
when the windshield wipers continuously
operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect and connect the
battery, or fully discharge and charge the
battery, the lighting level will switch to the
maximum setting.
E173259
Use the instrument lighting dimmer to adjust
the brightness of the instrument panel and
all applicable lighting in your vehicle.
• Tap the top or bottom of the control to
the first detent to brighten or dim all
interior lighting incrementally.
• Press and hold the top or bottom of the
control to the first detent until you reach
the desired lighting level.
72
MKS (), enUSA
Lighting
• Press and hold the top of the control to
the second detent to switch the interior
lights on.
• Press and hold the bottom of the control
to the second detent to switch the interior
lights off.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You will
hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch
off automatically after three minutes with
any door open or 30 seconds after the last
door has been closed. You can cancel this
feature by pulling the direction indicator
toward you again or switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the tail lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also,
the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility
conditions, such as daytime fog. Always
ensure that your headlamps are switched to
auto or on, as appropriate, during all low
visibility conditions. Failure to do so may
result in a collision.
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
When you switch the ignition to the on
position and the lighting control is in the off,
autolamps or parking lamp position, the
daytime running lamps will turn on whenever
the headlamps are off. They turn off only
when the headlamps are on.
Type 2 - Configurable
Note: If this type is equipped, you are able to
switch the daytime running lamps on or off
using the information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 88).
When the daytime running lamps are
switched on in the information display and
you switch the ignition to the on position with
the lighting control in the autolamps position,
the daytime running lamps turn on whenever
the headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps
and can be used to temporarily override
autolamp control.
When switched off in the information display,
the daytime running lamps are off in all
lighting control switch positions.
73
MKS (), enUSA
Lighting
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
The system will automatically turn on your
high beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the tail
lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
lighting, the system will turn off the high
beams before they distract other drivers. The
low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic control of
the high beams is not functioning properly,
check the windshield in front of the camera
for a blockage. A clear view of the road is
required for proper system operation. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera’s field-of-view repaired.
Note: If the system detects a blockage such
as bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,
and you do not observe changes, the system
will go into low beam mode until you clear the
blockage. A message may also appear in the
instrument cluster display noting the front
camera is blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water spots
will not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam system. However, in cold
or inclement weather conditions, you will
notice a decrease in the availability of the high
beam system, especially at start up. If you
want to change the beam state independently
of the automatic control, you may switch the
high beams on or off using the lever. Automatic
control will resume when conditions are
correct.
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height
such as using much larger tires, may degrade
feature performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to decide when to turn
the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
will turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of the vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than 32 mph
(52 km/h).
The high beams will turn off if:
• The system detects the headlamps of an
approaching vehicle or the tail lamps of
a preceding vehicle.
• Vehicle speed falls below 27 mph
(44 km/h).
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects severe rain, snow or
fog.
• The camera is blocked.
Activating the System
Switch on the system using the information
display and autolamps. See Information
Displays (page 88). See Autolamps (page
71).
E173258
A
74
MKS (), enUSA
Lighting
Switch the lighting control to the autolamps
position.
Manually Overriding the System
E167827
When the automatic control has activated
the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk
will provide a temporary override to low
beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or switch
the lighting control from autolamps to
headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
E193834
A
Pull the lighting control toward you to switch
the fog lamps on.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except Off
and the high beams are not on.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS
The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This provides
more visibility when driving around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps.
B. With adaptive headlamps.
E161714
B
A
The system only works with the lighting
control in the autolamp position.
Note: There is a delay of two to five seconds
before the system operates when you drive
your vehicle.
75
MKS (), enUSA
Lighting
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system has a power-up movement check
feature. When your start your vehicle, the
lamps track left to right, then back to center
to alert the driver that the system is working
properly.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
• To operate the left-hand direction
indicator, push the lever down until it
stops.
• To operate the right-hand direction
indicator, push the lever up until it stops.
• To manually cancel direction indicator
operation, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up or down to the first stop
position and release. The direction
indicator will flash three times and stop.
• Push the lever up or down to the first stop
position and hold. The direction indicator
will flash for as long as you hold the lever
in this position.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will switch on when you have met
one of the following conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the outer edge of the clear lens
on the front row map lamp.
Front Row Map Lamps
E166237
To switch on the map lamps, press the outer
edge of the clear lens.
The front row map lamp will automatically
turn on when:
• Any door is opened.
• You press and hold the top of the
instrument lighting dimmer switch past
the first detent.
• You press any of the remote entry
controls and the ignition is in the off
position.
76
MKS (), enUSA
Lighting
Second Row Map Lamps
E173272
The second row lamps light when:
• Any door is open.
• You press and hold the top of the
instrument lighting dimmer switch past
the first detent.
• You press any of the remote entry
controls and the ignition is in the off
position.
Press the lamp lens to activate the reading
lamps.
AMBIENT LIGHTING
The ambient lighting system is adjusted with
the MyLincoln Touch. See MyLincoln
Touch™ (page 303).
77
MKS (), enUSA
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity of
the window openings.
E146043
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just
one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this noise.
One-Touch Down
Press the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the control fully and release it. Press or
lift the control again to stop the window.
Global Opening (If Equipped)
Press and hold the unlock button on the
remote control to open the front windows
and vent the moonroof. Release the button
when the motion starts. The windows and
moonroof continue opening.
Press the lock or unlock button on the remote
control to stop the motion.
Note: The ignition must be off and the
accessory delay feature must remain off to
operate this feature.
Note: To disable this feature, contact your
authorized dealer.
Bounce-Back
The window stops automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there is
an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse if
it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury
or damage to your vehicle.
Pull the window control up and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the control
before the window closes fully.
78
MKS (), enUSA
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It lights when you lock the
rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window controls for several
minutes after you switch the ignition off or
until you open either front door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E144073
Left-hand mirrorA
Adjustment controlB
Right-hand mirrorC
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control will illuminate.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror switch again.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
107).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 114).
Auto-Dimming Feature
The driver’ s exterior mirror will automatically
dim when the interior auto-dimming mirror
is activated.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex
mirror built into the upper outboard corner
of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to
increase your visibility along the side of your
vehicle.
79
MKS (), enUSA
Windows and Mirrors
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror. If
no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is
at a safe distance, signal that you intend to
change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to
verify traffic is clear and carefully change
lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is small
and near the inboard edge of the main mirror
when it is at a distance. The image becomes
larger and begins to move outboard across
the main mirror as the vehicle approaches
(A). The image will transition from the main
mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches (B). The
vehicle will transition to your peripheral field
of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System (page
176).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any
mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
80
MKS (), enUSA
Windows and Mirrors
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
SUN SHADES (If Equipped)
Note: Do not try to move the sun shade
manually.
The power rear sun shade covers the rear
window of the vehicle.
E187440
The control is on the center console.
The sun shade has a one-touch up and down
feature. Press and release the control to
move the sun shade. To stop motion, press
the control a second time.
The sun shade automatically retracts when
you shift the transmission into reverse (R).
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended in
the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
81
MKS (), enUSA
Windows and Mirrors
WARNINGS
When closing the dual panel moonroof,
you should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity of
the roof opening.
The moonroof and sunscreen controls are on
the overhead console.
The moonroof and sunscreen have a
one-touch open and close feature. To stop
the motion during a one-touch operation,
touch the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Sunscreen
E187439
Press and release the control to open the
sunscreen.
Note: The sunscreen stops at the first panel
for the dual panel moonroof. Press and release
the control again to continue opening the
sunscreen past the second panel.
Pull and release the control to close the
sunscreen. If open, the moonroof
automatically closes prior to the sunscreen
closing.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Press and release the SLIDE control to open
the moonroof. The sunscreen, if closed,
automatically opens prior to the moonroof
opening.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically stops closing
and reverses if it detects an obstacle when
closing.
To override the bounce-back function, pull
and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event. In this case,
the closing force begins to increase each of
the next three times the moonroof closes.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof.
Pull and release the TILT control to close the
moonroof.
82
MKS (), enUSA
Windows and Mirrors
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure they
work. If any lamps remain on after starting
your vehicle, refer to the respective system
warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the
information display and function the same as
a warning lamp, but do not display when you
start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
what mode the system is in: See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 164).
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned on.
Turns off when the speed control system is
turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is engaged.
Turns off when the speed control system is
disengaged.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to
have the normal braking system (without
ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp
is also illuminated. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately.
Brake System
E144522
It will illuminate when you engage
the parking brake with the ignition
on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If the
parking brake is not engaged, this indicates
low brake fluid level or a brake system
malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop your
vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by your
authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the risk
of personal injury.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the indicators
stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out
bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 252).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on and
any door is not completely closed.
84
MKS (), enUSA
Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 240).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving, this
indicates a malfunction. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
switch the engine off. Check the engine oil
level. See Engine Oil Check (page 239).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt. See Safety Belt
Minder (page 32).
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates a
malfunction. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Lights when you switch the front
fog lamps on.
Grade Assist (If Equipped)
E144523
It will illuminate when the grade
assist function has been turned on.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will illuminate
on the windshield in certain
instances when using adaptive
cruise control and/or the collision warning
system. It will also illuminate momentarily
when you start your vehicle to make sure the
display works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It will
flash when you use the headlamp
flasher.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or when
driving, check your tire pressure as
soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
85
MKS (), enUSA
Instrument Cluster
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain or
an AWD fault has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon indicator
light stays illuminated after the
engine is started, it indicates that
the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has
detected a malfunction of the vehicle
emissions control system. Refer to On board
diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling
chapter for more information about having
your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control
System (page 136).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter, the
fuel system, interior floor coverings or other
vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Have an authorized dealer service your
vehicle immediately.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first turned
on prior to engine start to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn
itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the service
engine soon light blinks eight times, it means
that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
See Emission Control System (page 136).
Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated or
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the system
will switch off. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. See
Using Stability Control (page 152).
Stability Control Off
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out when
you switch the system back on or
when you switch the ignition off. See Using
Stability Control (page 152).
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door and
you have left the key in the ignition with it in
the off or accessory position.
86
MKS (), enUSA
Instrument Cluster
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.
87
MKS (), enUSA
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in the
information display.
Information Display Controls
E173228
• Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow key
or OK to enter into that category. Press the
left arrow key as needed to exit back to the
main menu.
• Display Mode
• Trip 1 & 2
• Fuel Economy
• Driver Assist
• Settings
Display Mode
Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between the following display options.
88
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Display mode
Option 3Option 2Option 1Display mode
--XXXX mi (km) to empty
--XBar tachometer
XX-Round tachometer
X--Engine coolant temp gauge
Always PresentFuel gauge
Always PresentTotal odometer (lower left corner)
Regardless of display mode chosen, when you use the SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST, the cluster will change to the round
tachometer if not already selected. After the round tachometer displays, other display modes with the bar tachometer can also be chosen.
XXX mi (km) to empty
Shows approximate fuel level before the fuel
tank reaches empty. The value is dynamic
and can change (raise or lower) depending
on driving style.
Fuel gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is in
the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel pump
symbol shows the fuel filler door side of your
vehicle. When the fuel level becomes low,
the level indicator will change to amber.
When the fuel level becomes critically low,
the level indicator will change to red.
Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or when driving
on a slope.
Note: When a MyKey® is in use, low fuel
warnings will display earlier.
Bar or Round tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer
continuously at the top of the scale may
damage the engine. During SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the
currently selected gear will appear in the
display.
89
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
Trip 1 & 2
Choose between the following trip displays.
Trip 1 & 2
Trip distance
Average fuel economy
Elapsed trip time
Hold OK to Reset
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently
displayed trip information.
Trip distance
Shows the accumulated trip distance.
Average fuel economy
Shows the average fuel economy for a given
trip.
Elapsed trip time
When you switch off your vehicle the timer
stops and restarts when you restart your
vehicle.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to choose
the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Inst Fuel Economy
30 Min Fuel History
90
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently
displayed fuel usage information.
Inst Fuel Economy
This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.
30 Min Fuel History
This display shows a bar chart of your fuel
history.
Driver Assist
Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between the following display options.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
Driver Assist
Traction Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
High, Normal or LowSensitivityCollision Warn
Cross Traffic - check enabled or uncheck disabled
—Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Alert, Aid or BothModeLane Keeping
High, Normal or LowIntensity
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
91
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Settings
Comfort, Normal or SportHandling in DDrive ControlVehicle
Normal or SportHandling in S
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Normal or TowingDTE Calculation
Easy Entry / Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Right Hand or Left Hand TrafficTraffic Set UpAdaptive Head LampsLighting
On or OffAuto Highbeam
Select time intervalAutolamp Delay
Settings (cont’d)
Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabledLocksVehicle (cont’d)
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
All doors or Driver doorRemote Unlocking
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life Reset
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
92
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Settings (cont’d)
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote StartVehicle (cont’d)
Auto Heated or OffFront Seats
Front Seats and Steering Wheel
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Remote Open - check enabled or uncheck disabledWindows
Remote Close - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or uncheck disabledWipers
Rain Sensing - check enabled or uncheck disabled
MyKeys and Admin KeysMykey StatusMyKey
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Always On or User SelectableTraction Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Choose desired speed or offSpeed Minder
On or OffVolume Limiter
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
On or OffMyKey Report
93
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Settings (cont’d)
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Miles & GAL, l/100km or km/lDistanceDisplay Settings
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge Display
Choose your applicable setting - Hold OK to SetLanguage
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temperature
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available. Certain
messages may be abbreviated or shortened
depending upon which cluster type you have.
E173229
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
94
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 164).
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 164).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front
of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 164).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac
The traction control has been disabled or enabled by the driver.AdvanceTrac Off On
Alarm
ActionMessage
The alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 64).Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle
95
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off in XX Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off for Fuel Economy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to
override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in XX Seconds Press Ok
to Override
AWD
ActionMessage
The all-wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself due to the system overheating or
you are using the spare tire. The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and clear
this message after cycling the ignition and driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed
or after the system cools.
AWD Off
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly and the powertrain fault indicator is illumin-
ated. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 84). If the warning stays illuminated or continues
to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check AWD
96
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn
the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once the vehicle
has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical
loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off to Save Battery
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 176).
Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 176).Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 176).
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Cross Traffic System Fault
97
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Brake System
ActionMessage
The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 247).
Brake Fluid Level LOW
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.Check Brake System
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/
h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will be disabled.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Malfunction
The collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather
or ice/mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will be disabled.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not Available
98
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.Trunk Ajar
The driver’s door is opened, your vehicle is in park and the engine is on.Engine On
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level LOW
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.Press Brake to START
The key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting (page 126).No Key Detected
The Start Stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access key is not detected
inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Accessory Power is Active
99
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
ActionMessage
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service.Starting System Fault
During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is programmed to the system.Key Programmed x Keys Total
During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys have been programmed.Max Number of Keys Learned
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield to be cleaned to operate
properly.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required
The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
100
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
LOW Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 239).Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 239).Oil Change Required
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Overtemperature
The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may not allow some features to operate
properly. Contact an authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact Dealer
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate
properly. Contact an authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact Dealer
MyKey
ActionMessage
MyKey cannot be programmed during key programming .MyKey Not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive Safely
When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
101
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
ActionMessage
When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching 80
mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle Near Top Speed
MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive Safely
A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys.Could Not Program Integrated Key
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See
Parking Aid (page 153).
Check Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See
Parking Aid (page 153).
Check Rear Park Aid
The park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
102
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Steering Malfunction Service Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle a safe place. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Service Power Steering Now
The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive
entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
You need to turn the steering wheel in order to disengage the steering lock.Steering column lock: Remove and re-
insert key while turning wheel to unlock
Seats
ActionMessage
Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the seat, if the warning
stays on or continues to come on contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger Seat
103
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 279).
LOW Tire Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 279).
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more information on how
the system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 279).
If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Transmission
ActionMessage
You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any position other than P (Park).Shift to Park
104
MKS (), enUSA
Information Displays
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See Settings
(page 313).
E173267
– MY TEMP +: Adjust the temperature setting using the control on the driver side.A
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.B
– DUAL +: Press to increase or decrease the air temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle.C
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
D
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during
hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
105
MKS (), enUSA
Climate Control
MAX A/C: Adjust the control for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning
automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the
time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
F
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though
the air conditioning is switched off.
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.G
AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired
temperature. You can also turn off dual zone mode by pressing and holding the button for greater than two seconds.
H
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
107).
I
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns
off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
J
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air from
the footwell air vents regardless of the air
distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your
vehicle, do not drive with the system switched
off or with recirculated air always switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow to
the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach comfort
in hot weather, drive with the windows slightly
open for 2-3 minutes after start-up or until
your vehicle airs out.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle
interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. The system automatically adjusts
to heat or cool the cabin to your selected
temperature as quickly as possible. For the
system to function efficiently, the instrument
panel and side air vents should be fully open.
106
MKS (), enUSA
Climate Control
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Press the MAX A/C button.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
3. Direct the instrument panel side air vents
toward the side windows.
4. Close the instrument panel vents.
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running before
operating the heated windows.
E72507
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice and
fog. Press the button to switch the
system off. The heated rear window will
automatically turn off after a short period of
time.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. This
may cause damage to the heated rear
window grid lines. The vehicle warranty
does not cover damage caused to the
heated rear window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with
a scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it is
frozen in place. These actions could cause
damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass
with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
The heated exterior mirrors will remove ice,
mist and fog. When you switch the heated
rear window on, the heated exterior mirrors
will automatically turn on.
107
MKS (), enUSA
Climate Control
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter.
It is located behind the glove box.
The particulate filtration system reduces the
concentration of airborne particles such as
dust, spores and pollen in the air supplied to
the interior of your vehicle.
Note: To prevent foreign objects from entering
the system, make sure the cabin air is in place
at all times. Running the system without a filter
in place could result in degradation or damage
to the system.
The particulate filtration system gives you
and your passengers the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 392).
For additional cabin air filter information, or
to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.
REMOTE START
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The
climate control system works to achieve
comfort according to your previous settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system to
its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back on,
such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays (page
88).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats
or cools (based on previous settings). The
rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated
seats do not automatically switch on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster and
heated mirrors automatically switch on.
108
MKS (), enUSA
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take weight off the seat cushion and
affect the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death in
the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this can
cause the occupant to slide under the
safety belt, resulting in serious injury in
the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between yourself
and the steering wheel. We recommend
a minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety
belt over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head
restraint when your vehicle is moving.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied.
109
MKS (), enUSA
Seats
WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright driving
position before adjusting the head restraint.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it
is level with the top of your head and as far
forward as possible. Make sure that you remain
comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust
the head restraint to its highest position.
Front seat head restraint
E138642
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head restraint.A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Rear seat non-adjustable outboard head
restraints
E162605
An energy absorbing head restraint.A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Fold button.D
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold both C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
110
MKS (), enUSA
Seats
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button D.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving
or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it forward
again will then release it to the rearward,
untilted position.
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the front seat or seatback
when your vehicle is moving. This may
result in sudden seat movement,
causing the loss of control of your vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
111
MKS (), enUSA
Seats
E138647
112
MKS (), enUSA
Seats
Note: On vehicles with memory seats, to
prevent damage to the seat, the power seats
are designed to set a stopping position just
short of the end of the seat track. If the seat
encounters an object while moving forward or
backward, a new stopping position will be set.
To reset the seat to its normal stopping
position:
1. After encountering the new stopping
position, press the power seat control
again to override.
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the seat track.
3. Continue pressing the control for about
two seconds. You will feel the seat
bounce back slightly.
Power Lumbar
E173201
Press the top of the control (A) to raise the
height of the lumbar support. Press the
bottom of the control (A) to lower the height
of the lumbar support
Press the front of the control (B) to adjust
firmness. Press the rear of the control (B) to
adjust softness.
Multi-Contour Front Seats With
Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system will turn off after
20 minutes.
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to activate
the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seatback and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.
E173202
Cushion and seat back massage
control.
A
Lumbar control.B
Power seat controls.C
• Seat cushion massage: Press and release
the front portion of the massage control
(A). Press again to cancel or press the
lumbar control to cancel.
• Seatback massage: Press and release the
rear portion of the massage button (A).
Press again to cancel or press the lumbar
control to cancel.
• Lumbar selection: Press either up or down
on the lumbar control (B) to select the
top, middle, or bottom part of the
seatback.
113
MKS (), enUSA
Seats
• Lumbar adjust: Press and hold the front
of the lumbar control (B) to increase the
firmness of the selected portion of the
seatback. Press and hold the rear of the
lumbar to decrease the firmness.
• Power seat controls (C).
We recommend first selecting the lumbar to
the desired setting and then selecting the
back or cushion massage setting.
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are clear
of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function when
your vehicle is moving.
This feature will automatically recall the
position of the driver seat, power mirrors,
optional adjustable pedals and optional
power steering column. The memory control
is located on the driver door.
E142554
Saving a Preset Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors and
power steering column to your desired
positions.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a tone sound.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a Preset Position
Note: A preset memory position can only be
recalled when the ignition is off, or when the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N) (and
your vehicle is not moving) if the ignition is on.
You can recall a preset memory position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked to
a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Locks (page
56).
Note: When the ignition is off, use a linked fob
to recall your memory position. This moves the
seat and steering column to the Easy Entry
position.
Note: During a memory recall, press any seat,
mirror control, or any memory control to cancel
the operation.
Driving your vehicle will also stop any seat
recall movement.
Linking a Preset Position to Your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key
You can save the preset memory positions
for up to three remote controls or intelligent
access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
114
MKS (), enUSA
Seats
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
for a few seconds. A tone will sound.
Continue holding until a second tone is
heard.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in Step 3, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit feature,
it automatically moves the driver seat
position rearward up to two inches (five
centimeters) and the steering column up and
forward when you switch the ignition off.
When you switch the ignition on, the driver
seat will return to the previous position.
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 88).
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion, because this may cause
the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture
the seat with pins, needles, or other pointed
objects because this may damage the
heating element which may cause the seat
heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the
engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol located on the
touchscreen to cycle through the various heat
settings and off. Warmer settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
heated seats are on, the feature will turn
itself off. You will need to reactivate it.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the
engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
115
MKS (), enUSA
Seats
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol located on the
touchscreen to cycle through the various
cooling settings and off. Cooler settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself
off. You will need to reactivate it.
Heated and Cooled Seat Air Filter
Replacement (If Equipped)
The climate controlled seat system includes
air filters. You must replace them periodically.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page 392).
Locate the filters under each front seat and
access them from the second-row footwell
area. Move the front seats all the way
forward and to the full up positions to ease
access.
E146319
To remove an air filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge of the
filter and rotate counterclockwise once
the tabs are released, then remove the
filter.
E146321
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its housing
making sure that the far forward end is
all the way up in the housing.
2. Push in on the center of the outside edge
of the filter and rotate up into the housing
until it clips into position.
Rear Heated Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion, because this may cause
the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture
the seat with pins, needles, or other pointed
objects because this may damage the
heating element which may cause the seat
heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
116
MKS (), enUSA
Seats
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
The heated seats only operate when the
ignition is on.
To operate the heated seats:
E166817
• Press the indicated side of the control for
minimum heat.
• Press again to turn off.
E146322
• Press the indicated side of the control for
maximum heat.
• Press again to turn off.
The indicator light will illuminate when you
switch on the heated seats.
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E144635
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder. To open the storage lid, pull
up on the latch located between the
cupholders.
Armrest pass-through
Note: Do not exceed 80 pounds (36
kilograms) of weight on the pass-through door.
117
MKS (), enUSA
Seats
E152622
Release the latch, then pull down on the door
located in the back of the armrest. You can
store cargo of a longer length such as skis or
lumber.
118
MKS (), enUSA
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control System
(If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the system with any garage
door opener that does not have the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards
(this includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction when
you are programming. Do not program the
system with the vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote
control transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the function button codes
later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the three
devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See
Erasing the function button codes later in this
section.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com or by calling
the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515.
In-vehicle programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1– 3 inches (2–8 centimeters)
away from the HomeLink button you
want to program.
119
MKS (), enUSA
Universal Garage Door Opener
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button.
DO NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for five seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice to
activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. See
Programming your garage door motor
later in this section.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
Do the following:
Press and hold the HomeLink button while
you press and release the hand-held
transmitter button every 2 seconds. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly once the HomeLink function
button recognizes and accepts the hand-held
transmitter’s radio frequency signal.
After programming the HomeLink button,
begin programming your garage door opener
motor.
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit
and you may need to remove the cover or lamp
lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming your garage door opener
motor
1. Press the learn button on the garage door
opener motor and then you have 30
seconds to complete the next two steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
120
MKS (), enUSA
Universal Garage Door Opener
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the button,
follow Step 1 in the Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must
already be programmed to operate with the
garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
121
MKS (), enUSA
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2
hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
122
MKS (), enUSA
Universal Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter socket
(if equipped). Improper use of the
lighter can cause damage not covered by
your warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will discharge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This will
damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a
fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for
operating a cigar lighter element.
Note: Improper use of the power point can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point. To prevent the battery from
discharging accidentally:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight
or when you park your vehicle for
extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• in the front of the center console
• inside the center console storage bin
• on the rear of the center console.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices plugged
in the power point whenever the device
is not in use. Do not use any extension
cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since
it will defeat the safety protection design.
Doing so my cause the power point to
overload due to powering multiple devices
that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: Keep the vehicle running to use the
power point.
E143941
You can use the power point for powering
electrical devices that require up to 150
watts. It is on the rear of the center console.
When the indicator light, located on the
power point, is:
• on — power point is ready to supply
power.
• off — power point power supply is off;
ignition is not on.
• flashing — power point is in fault mode.
123
MKS (), enUSA
Auxiliary Power Points
The power point temporarily turns off power
if it exceeds the 150 watt limit. It can also
switch to a fault mode if it detects
overloading, overheating, or shorting
conditions. For overloading and shorting
conditions, unplug your device and switch
the ignition off then on. For an overheating
condition, let the system cool off first. Switch
the ignition off then on.
Do not use the power point for certain electric
devices, including:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions
• Motor loads, for example vacuum
cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, or compressor-driven
refrigerators
• Measuring devices which process precise
data, for example medical equipment or
measuring equipment
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply, for example
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch sensor lamps
124
MKS (), enUSA
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as
items may become loose during hard braking,
acceleration or collisions, including hot drinks
which may spill.
Available console features include:
E173268
CupholdersA
Sliding driver and passenger arm
rests, utility compartment with
audio input jack, USB port and
power point
B
Rear power point, heated seat
switches and air vents
C
Power point door and a power rear
sunshade control
D
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
125
MKS (), enUSA
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine speeds
can produce very high temperatures in
the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Do
not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust
fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8
kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving characteristics
during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the impulse
electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices such as cellular phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside your
vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the
engine.
Note: When locking your vehicle, any remote
controls left inside the vehicle may become
disabled. A message may appear in the
information display indicating that there is no
key detected if you try to start the engine.
Press the unlock button on the remote control
to enable it, and then start the engine.
Ignition Modes
E142555
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
126
MKS (), enUSA
Starting and Stopping the Engine
On: All electrical circuits are operational and
the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press the
button for any length of time. An indicator
light on the button illuminates when then
ignition is on and when the engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total of
60 seconds (without the engine starting)
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to be
all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears in
the information display alerting you that you
exceeded the cranking time. You cannot
attempt to start the engine for at least 15
minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to a
15-second engine cranking time. You need to
wait 60 minutes before you can crank the
engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting the engine, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Put the transmission in park (P).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
The system does not function if:
• The key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, do the
following:
E173591
1. With the buttons facing the rear of the
vehicle and the key ring up, place the key
into the backup slot.
2. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, then the button to switch
the ignition on and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
the engine within 20 seconds of switching it
off, even if a valid key is not present.
127
MKS (), enUSA
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without the
key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if the
system does not detect a valid key. If you
open and close a door while the engine is
running, the system searches for a valid key.
You cannot restart the engine if the system
does not detect a valid key within 20
seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold
it there.
3. Start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling for
an extended period. The ignition also turns
off in order to save battery power. Before the
engine shuts down, a message appears in
the information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine
shuts down. Another message appears in the
information display to inform you that the
engine has shut down in order to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as you normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the
automatic engine shutdown feature. When
you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on (for the current ignition cycle only).
Use the information display to do so. See
Information Displays (page 88).
• During the countdown before engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press OK
or RESET (depending on your type of
information display) to temporarily
switch the feature off (for the current
ignition cycle only).
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Put the transmission in park (P).
2. Press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all
electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators.
128
MKS (), enUSA
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a loss
of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will be
required. When the ignition is switched off,
some electrical circuits, including air bags,
warning lamps and indicators may also be
off. If the ignition was turned off accidentally,
you can shift into neutral (N) and re-start the
engine.
1. Press and hold the button for one second,
or press it three times within two seconds.
2. Move the transmission selector lever to
neutral (N) and use the brakes to bring
your vehicle to a safe stop. When your
vehicle has stopped, move the
transmission selector lever to park (P)
and switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Do
not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust
fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in
exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its
dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we recommend
that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5
centimeters).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
WARNINGS
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances.
Do not use an indoor extension cord
outdoors. This could result in an electric
shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
129
MKS (), enUSA
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean
area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
130
MKS (), enUSA
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure.
If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel
filler door (Easy Fuel capless fuel
system), do not refuel until the sound stops.
Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could
cause serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle
can produce static electricity. This can
cause a fire if you are filling an
ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke or use a cell phone while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is
highly toxic and if swallowed can cause
death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may
not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to
eye and respiratory tract irritation. In
severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with water
for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the
skin, clothing or both, promptly remove
contaminated clothing and wash skin
thoroughly with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact with
fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact
could cause an adverse reaction. In
sensitive individuals, serious personal
injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin
thoroughly with soap and water. Consult
a physician immediately if you experience
an adverse reaction.
131
MKS (), enUSA
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
Your warranty will not cover any vehicle
damage, loss of vehicle performance or
repairs to your vehicle, caused by the use of
fuel not recommended.
Choosing the Right Fuel
Use only unleaded gasoline or unleaded
gasoline blended with a maximum of 15%
ethanol in your gasoline vehicle. If your
vehicle is a flex fuel vehicle (FFV), it will have
a yellow bezel placed over the fuel fill inlet.
Do not use:
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E-85 fuel.
• Fuel with methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (the use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
Note: Use of any fuel other than
recommended fuel can cause powertrain
damage, impair the emission control system
or cause loss of vehicle performance. Your
warranty will not cover any vehicle damage
caused by the use of fuel not recommended.
Octane Recommendations
E161513
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving conditions
while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, see your
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
3.7L V6 Engine
Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer fuels
posted as regular with an octane rating below
87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels
with octane levels below 87 are not
recommended.
3.5L V6 EcoBoost Engine
Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some fuel stations offer fuels
posted as regular with an octane rating below
87, particularly in high altitude areas. Do not
use fuels that have a posted rating below 87
octane.
Premium fuel will provide improved
performance and is recommended for severe
duty usage such as trailer tow.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this
situation may have an adverse effect on
powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
132
MKS (), enUSA
Fuel and Refueling
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. On restarting,
cranking time will take a few seconds
longer than normal. With keyless ignition,
just start the engine. Crank time will be
longer than usual.
• Normally, adding 1 gal (3.8 L)of fuel is
enough to restart the engine. If your
vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade,
more than 1 gal (3.8 L)may be required.
• The service engine soon indicator may
turn on. For more information on the
service engine soon indicator, See
Warning Lamps and Indicators (page
84).
Refilling With a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel
containers or aftermarket funnels into
the capless fuel system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may
cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of
filling the tank, which could result in serious
personal injury.
WARNINGS
Do not try to pry open or push open the
capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels, they
will not work with the capless fuel system and
can damage it. The included fuel funnel is
specially designed to work safely with your
vehicle.
When filling your vehicle’s fuel tank from a
portable fuel container, use the funnel
included with your vehicle.
1. Locate the portable funnel that comes
with your vehicle. The funnel is located in
the spare tire compartment.
E178461
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the capless
fuel system.
E178462
3. Fill your vehicle with fuel from the
portable fuel container.
133
MKS (), enUSA
Fuel and Refueling
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly
dispose of it. You can purchase extra
funnels from an authorized dealer if you
choose to dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island.
Switch off your engine when you are
refueling.
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against
the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Do not use personal electronic devices
while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
your vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with
the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold the
fuel pump handle in the fill position.
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under pressure.
If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel
filler door, do not refuel until the sound
stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which
could cause serious personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
E175448
2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel
filler door and release to open.
E156032
Note: Hold the handle of the fuel filler nozzle
higher while you insert the nozzle for easier
access.
134
MKS (), enUSA
Fuel and Refueling
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into
the fuel system to open both doors. Leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you have
stopped pumping fuel.
E154765
Note: Allow about five to ten seconds after
pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler
nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back
into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle.
4. After you have stopped pumping fuel,
slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the tank
to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the
fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run
down the drain located below and in front of
the fuel filler door.
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the
center-rear edge of the fuel filler door and
then release. The fuel door will latch
closed.
If the fuel fill inlet did not close properly, a
Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear
on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any
visible debris from the fuel fill opening.
4. Insert the fuel fill nozzle, or the fuel fill
funnel provided with the vehicle, several
times to allow the inlet to close properly.
This will dislodge any debris preventing
the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It may
take several driving cycles for the message
to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an
engine start-up (after four or more hours with
the engine off) followed by city or highway
driving. Continuing to drive with the message
on may cause the service engine soon lamp
to turn on as well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty,
you might not be able to refuel the full amount
of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due
to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for
driving. The usable capacity of the fuel tank
is the amount of fuel that can be put into the
tank after the gauge indicates empty. The
advertised capacity is the total fuel tank size
– it is the combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine is
left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high)
each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
135
MKS (), enUSA
Fuel and Refueling
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first
1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving (this
is your engine’s break-in period); a more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2000 miles - 3000 miles (3200 kilometers
- 4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense,
frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings
are not accurate ways to measure fuel
economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill ups, fill
the fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles
traveled by gallons used (For Metric:
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by
kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving
conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how
temperature impacts fuel economy. In
general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel
economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately.
Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a catalytic
converter that will enable your vehicle to
comply with applicable exhaust emission
standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control
components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of components
affecting emission control, such non-Ford
parts should be the equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance
and durability.
136
MKS (), enUSA
Fuel and Refueling
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power
could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners
and anyone who manufactures, repairs,
services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or
supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with an on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitors
the engine’s emission control system. This
system protects the environment by ensuring
that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II
system also assists your authorized dealer in
properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
• the vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine
may misfire or run poorly
• poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
• the fuel fill inlet may not have been
properly closed See Refueling (page 134).
• driving through deep water—the electrical
system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city/highway driving. No
additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness, and
lead to more costly repairs.
137
MKS (), enUSA
Fuel and Refueling
Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to
inspect the emission control equipment on
your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work, you
may need to have the vehicle
serviced. See On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, your
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just
been serviced, or the battery has recently run
down or been replaced, the OBD-II system
may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is
ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to
the on position for 15 seconds without
cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the
service engine soon indicator stays on solid,
it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you may
need to perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours
without starting the engine. Then, start the
engine and complete the above driving cycle.
The engine must warm up to its normal
operating temperature. Once started, do not
turn off the engine until the above driving
cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not
ready for I/M testing, you will have to repeat
the above driving cycle.
138
MKS (), enUSA
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the gearshift is latched in
Park (P). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you
leave your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than three seconds will limit engine
rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the button on the front of
the gearshift lever.
3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired
gear.
4. Release the button and your transmission
will remain in the selected gear.
P
R
N
D
S
E142628
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the front wheels from turning. Come
to a complete stop before putting your
vehicle into and out of Park (P)
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in Reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and out
of Reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in Neutral (N), you
can start your vehicle and it is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
The normal driving position for the best fuel
economy. Transmission operates in gears
one through six.
Sport (S)
Moving the gearshift lever to Sport (S):
• Provides additional grade (engine)
braking and extends lower gear operation
to enhance performance for uphill climbs,
hilly terrain or mountainous areas. This
will increase engine RPM during engine
braking.
• Provides additional lower gear operation
through the automatic transmission shift
strategy.
• Gears are selected more quickly and at
higher engine speeds.
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission (If Equipped)
Your SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears
manually.
139
MKS (), enUSA
Transmission
With your vehicle in Drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.
You can achieve extensive manual control
by moving the gearshift lever to the Sport (S)
position.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
The system determines when temporary
manual control is no longer in use and returns
to automatic control.
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended
for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6
The instrument cluster will display your
currently selected gear.
The transmission will automatically upshift
if your engine speed is too high or downshift
if your engine speed is too low.
Note: The system will stay in manual control
until you move the gearshift lever to another
position. For example, Drive (D).
Note: Engine damage may occur if excessive
engine revving is held without shifting.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify
that the brake lamps are working.
When doing this procedure, you will be
taking the vehicle out of park which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always
fully set the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released, but
the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature will be
disabled.
Use the brake shift interlock lever to move
the gearshift lever from the park position in
the event of an electrical malfunction or if
your vehicle has a dead battery.
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition
off before performing this procedure.
140
MKS (), enUSA
Transmission
E173230
1. Remove the side panel on the left side of
the gearshift lever.
2. Locate the brake shift interlock lever on
the left side of the gearshift assembly.
3. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press down
and hold the brake shift interlock lever
while pulling the gearshift lever out of
Park (P) and into Neutral (N).
4. Install the side panel in reverse order.
5. Apply brake pedal, start your vehicle, and
release the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature is designed to increase durability
and provide consistent shift feel over the life
of the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This
operation is considered normal and will not
affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning
process will fully update transmission
operation. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
the strategy must be relearned.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is
not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping between
shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
141
MKS (), enUSA
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to power
the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road conditions
that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot. The AWD system is active all the time
and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not for off-road
use. The AWD feature gives your vehicle some
limited off-road capabilities in which driving
surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free
and otherwise similar to normal on-road
driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could
subject the vehicle to excessive stress which
might result in damage not covered under your
warranty.
Note: When an AWD system fault is present,
the warning Check AWD displays in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 94). An AWD system fault
causes the AWD system to default to
front-wheel drive only mode. If this warning
displays, have your vehicle serviced at an
authorized dealer.
Note: The AWD Off message displays in the
information display if the AWD system has
overheated See Information Messages
(page 94). This condition may occur if the
vehicle operates in extreme conditions with
excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand. To
resume normal AWD function as soon as
possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes.
After the engine restarts and the AWD system
has adequately cooled, the AWD Off message
turns off and normal AWD function returns. In
the event you do not stop the engine, the AWD
Off message turns off when the system cools
and normal AWD function returns.
Do not use a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided. The AWD system
may disable automatically and enter
front-wheel drive only mode to protect
driveline components if you install the
mini-spare tire. A warning in the information
display indicates this condition. See
Information Messages (page 94). If there
is an AWD Off message in the information
display from using the spare tire, this
indicator should turn off after reinstalling the
repaired or replaced normal road tire and
cycling the ignition off and on. Reinstall the
repaired or replaced road tire as soon as
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between
the front and rear axles could cause the AWD
system to stop functioning and default to
front-wheel drive or damage the AWD
system.
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on
and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Lower gear operation
maximizes the engine and transmission
cooling capability. Under severe operating
conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Use extreme care when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
142
MKS (), enUSA
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application. Ease the vehicle back
onto the pavement only after reducing
your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the
road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you do
not slow down or if you turn the steering
wheel too sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors, with
minor damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the pavement
which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover.
Remember, your safety and the safety of
others should be your primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the transmission is in park
(P). Turn the ignition to the lock
position or turn the vehicle off using the
start/stop button and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
If you release the parking brake and the
brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure
a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is
not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a
few minutes or damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow you
can rock it out by shifting between forward
and reverse gears, stopping between shifts,
in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™,
it may be beneficial to disengage the
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid "over-driving"
your vehicle (i.e., turn the steering wheel
only as rapidly and as far as required to
avoid the emergency). Excessive steering
results in less vehicle control, not more.
Additionally, if changes in vehicle speed
are necessary, use smooth variations of
accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure
to adjust vehicle speed. Avoid abrupt
143
MKS (), enUSA
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
steering, acceleration or braking which
could result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or
personal injury. Use all available road
surface to return the vehicle to a safe
direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e., from concrete to
gravel) the way the vehicle responds to
a maneuver changes (steering,
acceleration or braking). Again, avoid
these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to
a lower gear and drive steadily through the
terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid excessive wheel slip.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for an
extended period of time. This could cause
the AWD system to overheat and default to
front-wheel drive. If this occurs AWD Off
displays in the Information Display. To
resume normal AWD function as soon as
possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes.
After the engine restarts and the AWD
system has adequately cooled, the AWD Off
message turns off and normal AWD function
returns. In the event you do not stop the
engine, the AWD Off message turns off when
the system cools and normal AWD function
returns.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
maximizes the engine and transmission
cooling capability. Under severe operating
conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and cause
the vehicle to become stuck to the point that
assistance may be required from another
vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with
caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may be
limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and
proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
E142667
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying improves
when you move your vehicle slowly while
applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
144
MKS (), enUSA
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in
slick mud. As when you are driving over sand,
apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide,
steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,
the axle lubricant and AWD PTU (Power
Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked
and changed if necessary.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities in
our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our national
forest and other public and private lands by
“treading lightly.”
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling
over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive
over the crest of a hill without seeing what
conditions are on the other side. Do not drive
in reverse (R) over a hill without the aid of an
observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent
has started. This reduces strain on the engine
and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turn around
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power can cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral (N); instead,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose
control. The front wheels have to be turning
in order to steer the vehicle.
145
MKS (), enUSA
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery conditions
that require tire chains or cables, then
it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive steering to
reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle
control which can lead to serious injury or
death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any
other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
does not stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Since your vehicle is equipped with a four
wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 147).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your
vehicle provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load
carrying capability. For this reason, Ford
Motor Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (such as lowering
kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the
center of gravity can make it more likely the
vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of
control. Ford Motor Company recommends
you use caution with any vehicle equipped
with a high load or device (such as ladder or
luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect driver and
passenger safety. If the vehicle experiences
off-highway use, check the vehicle chassis
components more frequently.
146
MKS (), enUSA
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the brake
linings may be worn-out. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the
steering wheel while braking, have it checked
by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving conditions.
Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear
and does not contribute to brake noise. See
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels (page 261).
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 84).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few
times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly
by measuring the rate at which you press the
brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal, and
can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you turn the ignition on. If the
light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the system
may be disabled. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the brake
pedal will pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may
also hear a noise from the system. This is
normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
147
MKS (), enUSA
Brakes
PARKING BRAKE
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released, but
the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, then driving your vehicle
could result in reduced braking ability,
increased stopping distances and potential
loss of brakes. See your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the transmission is placed
in park (P). Failure to set the parking
brake and engage park could result in vehicle
roll-away, property damage or bodily injury.
Turn the ignition to the lock position and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent.
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
Failure to leave your vehicle securely parked
may lead to a crash or injury. See Parking
Brake (page 148).
You must remain in your vehicle when
the system turns on. At all times, you
are responsible for controlling your
vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
The system will turn off if a malfunction
is apparent or if you rev the engine
excessively. Failure to take care may
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The
system releases the brakes automatically
once the engine has developed sufficient
drive to prevent your vehicle from rolling
down the slope. This is an advantage when
pulling away on a slope, for example from a
car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing
uphill into a parking space.
Note: The system only functions when you
bring your vehicle to a complete standstill.
Shift the gearshift lever to reverse (R) when
facing downhill and first gear (1) when facing
uphill.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate the
system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the
brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is
on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
148
MKS (), enUSA
Brakes
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on the
slope without rolling away for about two
to three seconds. This hold time
automatically extends if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
When you switch the ignition on, the system
automatically turns on. You can switch the
system on or off in the information display.
See General Information (page 88). The
system remains off until you switch the
ignition off.
Note: For vehicles with a manual
transmission, the system can be switched on
or off.
Note: For vehicles with an automatic
transmission, the system cannot be switched
off.
149
MKS (), enUSA
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order to
increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey®,
it is possible to prevent turning the traction
control system off. See MyKey™ (page 50).
In certain situations for example, stuck in
snow or mud, turning the traction control off
may be beneficial as this allows the wheels
to spin with full engine power. Depending on
the type of system you have on your vehicle,
you can either turn the system off using the
information display or by pressing the button.
Switching the System Off Using the
Information Display Controls (If
Equipped)
Your vehicle comes with this feature already
enabled. If required, you can switch this
feature off using the information display
controls. See Principle of Operation (page
150).
Switching the System Off Using a
Switch (If Equipped)
The button is located in the instrument panel.
Press the button. You will see a message in
conjunction with an illuminated icon in the
display. Press the button again to return the
system to normal mode.
When you switch the traction control system
off, stability control remains fully active.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
WARNING
If a failure has been detected within the
AdvanceTrac system, the stability
control light will illuminate steadily.
Verify that the AdvanceTrac system was not
manually disabled through the information
display. If the stability control light still
illuminates steadily, have the system serviced
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac
disabled could lead to an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
E138639
The stability control light
temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving
condition activates the stability system.
The stability control off light
temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when you
turn the traction control system off.
When you turn the traction control system
off or on, a message appears in the
information display showing system status.
150
MKS (), enUSA
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving braking
system, aftermarket roof racks,
suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of the
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the AdvanceTrac system. In
addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers
may interfere with and adversely affect the
AdvanceTrac system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and the
front seats in order to minimize the risk of
interfering with the AdvanceTrac sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the
AdvanceTrac system could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you
to lose control of your vehicle increasing the
risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac system is an
WARNINGS
indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac Control system helps you
keep control of your vehicle when on a
slippery surface. The electronic stability
control portion of the system helps avoid
skids and lateral slides. The traction control
system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss
of traction. See Using Traction Control
(page 150).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without AdvanceTrac
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with AdvanceTrac
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
151
MKS (), enUSA
Stability Control
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac®
The system automatically activates when
you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac
system cannot be completely turned off, but
the electronic stability control system is
disabled when the transmission selector lever
is in position R. You can turn off the traction
control portion of the system independently.
See Using Traction Control (page 150).
152
MKS (), enUSA
Stability Control
PARKING AID (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations of
the system as contained in this section.
Sensing is only an aid for some (generally
large and fixed) objects when moving on a
flat surface at parking speeds. Certain objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves,
traffic control systems, fluorescent lamps,
inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function
of the sensing system; this may include
reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large
stationary objects to avoid damaging the
vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the
ground.
WARNINGS
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are
covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent,
the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false
alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, it is possible to prevent turning the
sensing system off. See MyKey™ (page 50).
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of the
bumper area. The system turns on
automatically whenever you switch the
ignition on.
When receiving a detection warning, the radio
volume reduces to a predetermined level.
After the warning goes away, the radio
volume returns to the previous level.
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). If your vehicle
is equipped with a front sensing system, you
can switch the system off using the parking
aid switch. See General Information (page
88).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display
and you cannot switch the system on through
the pop-up message or parking aid switch.
See Information Messages (page 94).
Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object farther
than 12 in (30 cm) from the side of the
vehicle, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
153
MKS (), enUSA
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 feet (1.8
meters) from the rear bumper.
There is decreased coverage area
at the outer corners of the bumper.
A
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R):
• Moving toward a stationary object at a
speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• Not moving, but a moving object is
approaching the rear of the vehicle at a
speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• Moving at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h) and a moving object is
approaching the rear of the vehicle at a
speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 11.81 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the center stack display
(if equipped). The distance indication is
present when the transmission is in reverse
(R).
• As the distance to the obstacle decreases
(obstacle becomes closer), the indicator
blocks will illuminate and move towards
the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks show greyed
out.
Front Sensing System
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than park
(P).
E130382
A
Coverage area of up to 27 inches
(70 centimeters) from the front of
the vehicle and about 6–14 inches
(15–35 centimeters) to the side of
the front end of the vehicle. Refer
to the reverse sensing section for
details on coverage area.
A
154
MKS (), enUSA
Parking Aids
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front
sensing system provides audio warnings
when the vehicle is moving and the detected
obstacle is moving towards the vehicle. Once
the vehicle reaches a standstill condition, the
audio warning stops after 2 seconds.
Additionally, the system provides obstacle
distance indication through the center stack
display (if equipped). The distance indication
is present when the transmission is in reverse
(R).
• As the distance to the obstacle decreases
(obstacle becomes closer), the indicator
blocks illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks show greyed
out.
For automatic transmissions, if the gearshift
is in neutral (N), the system provides obstacle
distance indication through the center stack
display (if equipped). The front sensing
system provides visual warnings when the
vehicle is moving at a speed below 5 mph
(8 km/h) and an obstacle is located inside
the front or rear sensing detection areas.
Once the vehicle reaches a standstill
condition, the visual warnings stop after 4
seconds.
If the gearshift is in drive (D) or any other
forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S),
manual transmissions), the front sensing
system provides audio warnings when the
vehicle is moving and the system detects an
obstacle inside the front sensing detection
area. Once the vehicle reaches a standstill
condition, the audio warning stops after 2
seconds.
Additionally, the system provides distance
indication through the center stack display
(if equipped). The distance indication is
present if the vehicle is moving and an
obstacle is located inside the front sensing
detection area. Once the vehicle reaches a
standstill condition, the visual warnings stop
after 4 seconds, unless the detected obstacle
is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the
bumper.
For specific information on the reverse
sensing portion of the system, refer to that
section.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNING
Designed to be a supplementary park
aid, this system may not work in all
conditions. This system cannot replace
the driver’s attention and judgment. The
driver is responsible for avoiding hazards and
maintaining a safe distance and speed, even
when the system is in use.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the system
and intervening if required.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects in
heavy rain or other conditions that cause
disruptive reflections.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
The system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers the
vehicle into the space (hands-free) while you
control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes.
The system visually and audibly instructs you
to park the vehicle.
155
MKS (), enUSA
Parking Aids
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front bumper
and the parking space (a pedestrian or
cyclist) or if the edge of the neighboring
parked vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck).
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a foreign object (bike
rack or trailer) to the front or rear of your
vehicle or attached close to the sensors.
• You have attached an overhanging object
(surfboard) to the roof.
• The front bumper or side sensors are
damaged or obstructed by a foreign
object (front bumper cover).
• A mini-spare tire is in use.
Using Active Park Assist
E144525
Press the button located on the
right side of the center stack.
The touchscreen displays a message and a
corresponding graphic to indicate it is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to indicate which side of
your vehicle you want the system to search.
Note: If the direction indicator is not on, the
system automatically searches on the vehicle's
passenger side.
A
E130107
156
MKS (), enUSA
Parking Aids
When the system finds a suitable space, the
touchscreen displays a message and a chime
sounds. Slow down, continue moving forward
and stop when another chime sounds and a
message displays on the touchscreen (at
approximately position A), then follow the
instructions on the touchscreen.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
Note: Active park assist may not detect
vehicles with overhanging loads (a bus or a
truck), street furniture and other items. You
must make sure the selected space is suitable
for parking.
Note: You should drive your vehicle as parallel
to the other vehicles as possible while passing
a parking space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if the
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are
driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 20 mph
(35 km/h), the touch screen shows a message
to alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10
km/h), the system switches off and you need
to take full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into Reverse
(R), with your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement), your
vehicle steers itself into the space. Indicated
by tones, instructions to move your vehicle
back and forth in the space, display on the
touchscreen.
E130108
157
MKS (), enUSA
Parking Aids
When you think your vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied
by a touchscreen display message and a
chime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is finished, the
touch screen displays a message and a chime
sounds, indicating that the active park assist
process is done. The driver is responsible for
checking the parking job and making any
necessary corrections before putting the
transmission in Park (P).
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button.
• Grabbing the steering wheel.
• Driving above approximately 20 mph (35
km/h) for 30 seconds during an active
park search.
• Driving above 6 mph (10 km/h) during
automatic steering.
• Turning off the traction control system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also deactivate
the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated on a
slippery or loose surface.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
• Something touches the steering wheel.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message is displayed, followed by
a chime. Occasional system messages may
occur in normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an authorized
dealer to have your vehicle serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off
The transmission is in Reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space
The system does not offer a particular space
Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors
There is not enough room on both sides of your vehicle in order to park
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space
158
MKS (), enUSA
Parking Aids
The system does not offer a particular space
Your vehicle is farther than 6.5 ft (2.0 m) from the parking space
Your vehicle is closer than 16 in. (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles
The transmission is in Reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space
Your vehicle is going faster than 20 mph (35 km/h)
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward when Reverse [R] is selected)
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes)
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed, etc.)
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash)
159
MKS (), enUSA
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that still
requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper,
might not be seen on the screen due to
the limited coverage of the camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your reaction
time to stop the vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear video
camera and the trunk is ajar. If the trunk
is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be
incorrect. All guidelines (if enabled) have
been removed when the trunk is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off while in R (Reverse).
Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
The image will display in either the rear view
mirror or the display in the center of the
instrument panel.
During operation, lines will appear in the
display that represent your vehicle’ s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
E192471
The camera is located on the trunk.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in Reverse (R).
The system uses three types of guides to help
you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful when
backing into a parking space or aligning
your vehicle with another object behind
you.
• Centerline (if applicable): Helps align the
center of your vehicle with an object
(trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in Reverse (R) and
the luggage compartment is ajar, no rear view
camera features will display.
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in Reverse (R), have the
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle. This
might not provide adequate coverage and you
might not see some objects. In some vehicles,
the guidelines may disappear once you
connect the trailer tow connector.
160
MKS (), enUSA
Parking Aids
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to damage
to the rear of your vehicle.
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the touch screen when the
transmission is not in Reverse (R):
• Menu > Vehicle > Rear View Camera
After changing a system setting, the touch
screen shows a preview of the selected
features.
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is in
Reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if Active
or Fixed guidelines are on.
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelines (if equipped)A
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
If your vehicle is equipped with active
guidelines they are only available with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the
steering wheel to point the guidelines toward
an intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on your steering wheel
position. When your steering wheel position
is straight, the active guidelines are not
visible.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and
objects in the green zone are farther away.
Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as
they move from the green zone to the yellow
or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and
rear view mirror to get better coverage on
both sides and rear of your vehicle.
Enhanced Park Aids
Note: Enhanced park aids are only available
when the transmission is in Reverse (R).
161
MKS (), enUSA
Parking Aids
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and
may not detect certain angular or moving
objects.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when the reverse sensing system
detects an object. The alert highlights the
closest object detected. You can disable the
reverse sensing alert if you have visual park
aid alert enabled, you will still see the
displayed highlighted areas.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full area
behind your vehicle is not shown. Be
aware of your surroundings when using
the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in Reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in Reverse (R).
When you shift the transmission out of
Reverse (R), the feature automatically turns
off and you must enable it to use it used
again.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of
Reverse (R) and into any gear other than Park
(P), the camera image remains in the display
until your vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10
km/h or until you select a radio button.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
162
MKS (), enUSA
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control in heavy
traffic, on winding roads or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury
or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above the
set speed. The system will not apply
the brakes. Change down a gear to assist the
system in maintaining the set speed. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below your set speed while driving
uphill.
E173592
The cruise controls are located on the
steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press the ON control up and release.
E71340
The indicator will appear in the
instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press the SET control upward and
release.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the
instrument cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, you will return to the speed that you
previously set.
• PressSET up or down and hold to
increase or decrease the set speed.
Release the control when you reach the
desired speed.
• PressSET up or down and release. The
set speed will change in approximately 1
mph (2 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press SET
up and release.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You will
not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.
163
MKS (), enUSA
Cruise Control
Press the OFFcontrol down and release or
turn off the ignition.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to changing
road conditions, especially when using
adaptive cruise control. Adaptive cruise
control cannot replace attentive driving.
Failing to follow any of the warnings below
or failing to pay attention to the road may
result in a crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control will not detect
stationary or slow moving vehicles
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control will not detect
pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
Adaptive cruise control will not detect
oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control
when entering or leaving a highway, in
heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, slippery or unpaved.
WARNINGS
Do not use in poor visibility, specifically
fog, rain, spray or snow.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
The system adjusts your speed to maintain
a proper distance between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select from one of four gap settings.
E173593
The controls for using your cruise control are
located on the steering wheel.
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control
Press and release ON.
E144529
The information display will show
the grey indicator light, current
gap setting, and Set. The system
is set to standby mode.
E173594
The current gap setting and SET will also
display.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press SET upward and release. The
vehicle speed will be stored in the
memory.
3. The information display will show a green
indicator light, current gap setting and
desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
164
MKS (), enUSA
Cruise Control
E173595
5. A lead vehicle graphic will illuminate if
there is a vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle in front of you,
your vehicle will not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor will your
vehicle always decelerate quickly enough to
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Always apply the brakes when necessary.
Failing to do so may result in a crash, serious
injury or death.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning
or a delayed warning. You should always
apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to
do so may result in a crash, serious injury or
death.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when
modulated by the adaptive cruise control
system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same
lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same
lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain
a preset gap distance. The distance setting
is adjustable.
The lead vehicle graphic will illuminate.
To help you pass a vehicle in front of you, the
adaptive cruise control system may provide
a small temporary acceleration when you
switch on your left turn signal while following
a lead car.
The vehicle will maintain a constant distance
between the vehicle ahead until:
• the vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed
• the vehicle in front of you moves out of
your lane or out of view
• the vehicle speed falls below 16 mph (26
km/h)
• a new gap distance is set.
The vehicle will apply the brakes to slow the
vehicle to maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front. The maximum braking which
the system can apply is limited. You can
override the system by applying the brakes.
If the system predicts that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an audible
warning will sound while the system
continues to brake. This is accompanied by
a heads-up display; a red warning bar
illuminating on the windshield. You should
take immediate action.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
165
MKS (), enUSA
Cruise Control
E173593
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you by pressing the gap control downward
or upward.
E173595
The selected gap appears in the information
display as shown by the bars in the graphic.
Four gap distance settings are available.
Adaptive cruise control, distance between vehicle settings
Dynamic behaviorDistance gapTime gap, secondsGraphic display, bars indic-
ated between vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport31 (28)1162 (100)
Normal43 (39)1.4262 (100)
Normal55 (50)1.8362 (100)
Comfort67 (61)2.2462 (100)
Each time you start the vehicle, the system
will select the last chosen gap for the current
driver.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
Press the brake pedal or press CNCL. The
last set speed will appear in grey.
166
MKS (), enUSA
Cruise Control
Overriding Adaptive Cruise Control
WARNING
Whenever the driver is overriding the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, the system will not
automatically apply the brakes to maintain
separation from any vehicle ahead.
You can override the set speed and gap
distance by pressing the accelerator pedal.
E144529
When you override the system, the
green indicator light illuminates
and the lead vehicle graphic does
not show in the information
display.
The system will resume operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed will decrease to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
• Accelerate or brake to the desired speed,
then press SET upward and release.
• Increase or decrease the speed by holding
SET upward or downward SET until the
desired set speed shows on the
information display. The vehicle speed
will gradually change to the selected
speed.
• Increase or decrease the speed in
increments of 1 mph (2km/h) by briefly
pressing SET upward or downward.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
your vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed will display continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of the
set speed and intend to return to it.
Press and release RES. The vehicle will return
to the previously set speed. The set speed
will display continuously in the information
display while the system is active.
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation
The system is not functional at vehicle
speeds below 16 mph (26 km/h). An audible
alarm will sound and the automatic braking
releases if the vehicle drops below this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm will sound and the
system will shut down if it is applying brakes
for an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool down. The system will function
normally again when the brakes have cooled
down.
You should select a lower gear position when
the system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep grades,
for example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
them from overheating.
Switching the System Off
Note: The set speed memory erases when
you switch off the system.
Press and release OFF or turn off the ignition.
167
MKS (), enUSA
Cruise Control
Detection Issues
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic will not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move fully
into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a
bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert
and intervene when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or false
vehicle detections. See an authorized dealer
to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
168
MKS (), enUSA
Cruise Control
Blocked Sensor
WARNINGS
Do not use the system when towing a
trailer with brake controls. Aftermarket
trailer brakes will not function properly
when you switch the system on because the
brakes are electronically controlled. Failing
to do so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect
the normal operation of the system.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.
E145632
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The sensor
is located behind a fascia cover near the
driver side of the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and will not
function when something obstructs the radar
signals. The following table lists possible
causes and actions for this message
displaying.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is free from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no
roadside objects.
169
MKS (), enUSA
Cruise Control
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning and not
be blocked. This can happen, for example,
when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition will
either self clear or clear after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake due
to slower vehicles. Always be aware of
which mode you have selected and
apply the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting will
not display, the system will not automatically
respond to lead vehicles and automatic
braking will not activate. The system defaults
to adaptive cruise control when you start the
vehicle.
170
MKS (), enUSA
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed to
aid you. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system will
be active at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
When below the activation speed, the
information display will inform you that the
system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs including
the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using a
chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off through
the information display by selecting Settings
then Driver Assist then Driver Alert in the
menu. When activated, the system will
monitor your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At first
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message will
only appear for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
another warning may be issued which will
remain in the information display for a longer
time. Press OK on the steering wheel control
to clear the warning
System Display
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only
issue a warning if required. You can view the
status at any time using the information
display. See General Information (page
88).
The alertness level is shown by six steps in a
colored bar.
E131358
The current assessment of your alertness is
within a typical range.
E131359
171
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right as
the calculated alertness level decreases. As
the rest icon is approached the color turns
from green to yellow to red. The yellow
position indicates the first warning is active
and the red position indicates the second
warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a warning;
you should consider resting, even if the current
assessment is with the typical range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph (64
km/h), the alertness level will change to grey
for a short time and the information display
will inform you that the system is unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
The system is designed to aid the driver.
It is not intended to replace your
attention and judgment. You are still
responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short period,
the system will alert you to put your hands on
the steering wheel. The system may detect a
light grip or touch on the steering wheel as
hands off driving.
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out of
your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey®
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey®,
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.
Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system. You can only change the mode
and intensity settings.
E173233
Press the button located on the
center console to switch the
system on or off.
172
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
System Settings
The system has one standard feature setting
and one optional setting menu available. To
view or adjust the settings, See General
Information (page 88). The system stores
the last known selection for each of these
settings. You do not need to readjust your
settings each time you turn on the system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select which
of the system features you can enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when an unintended lane departure
is detected.
E165516
Aid only – Provides a steering wheel vibration
when the system detects an unintended lane
departure.
A
B
A
B
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center. If your
vehicle continues drifting out of the lane, the
system provides a steering wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting does
not affect the aid mode.
173
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
• Low
• Medium
• High
System Display
E144813
When you switch on the system, an overhead
graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will
display in the information display.
E173234
If you select aid mode when you
switch on the system, arrows will
be displayed with lane markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may still
be displayed if adaptive cruise control is
enabled.
While the system is on, the color of the lane
markings will change to indicate the system
status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side(s). This may be
because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation speed.
• Your turn indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings in
the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain, fog),
traffic conditions (following a large
vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the
lane), or vehicle conditions (poor
headlamp illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention,
on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping aid
intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
You can temporarily disable the system at
any time by doing the following
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using your direction indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
174
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows
175
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been modified
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows or trailers
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS™) with Cross Traffic Alert (If
Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System aids you
in detecting vehicles that may have entered
the blind spot zone (A). The detection area
is on both sides of your vehicle, extending
rearward from the exterior mirrors to
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the
bumper. The system alerts you if certain
vehicles enter the blind spot zone while
driving.
Cross Traffic Alert warns you of vehicles
approaching from the sides when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
176
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles, people,
animals or infrastructure (fences, guardrails,
trees). It only alerts you to vehicles in the blind
zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through
the blind zone, typically fewer than two
seconds, the system does not trigger.
Using the Systems
The Blind Spot Information System turns on
when you start the engine and you drive your
vehicle forward above 2 mph (3 km/h); it
remains on while the transmission is in drive
(D) and neutral (N). If shifted out of drive (D)
or neutral (N), the system enters cross traffic
alert mode. Once shifted back into drive (D),
the Blind Spot Information System turns back
on when you drive your vehicle above 2 mph
(3 km/h).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P) or
provide any additional warning when a
direction indicator is on.
Cross Traffic Alert detects approaching
vehicles from up to 46 ft (14 m) away though
coverage decreases when the sensors are
blocked. Reversing slowly helps increase the
coverage area and effectiveness.
E142440
177
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage is nearly
maximized.
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.
178
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert systems illuminate a yellow alert
indicator in the outside mirror on the side of
your vehicle the approaching vehicle is
coming from.
Note: The alert indicator dims when the
system detects nighttime darkness.
Cross Traffic Alert also sounds a series of
tones and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is
coming from the right or left. Cross Traffic
Alert works with the reverse sensing system
that sounds its own series of tones. See
Parking Aid (page 153).
System Sensors
WARNING
Just prior to the system recognizing a
blocked condition and alerting the
driver, the number of missed objects
will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER
use the Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the side and rear view
mirrors or looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. The Blind Spot Information
System is not a replacement for careful
driving.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage warning
with no blockage present; this is rare and
known as a false blockage warning. A false
blocked condition either self-corrects or clears
after a key cycle.
E142443
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow
or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,
this can cause degraded system
performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor or low visibility appears
in the information display along with a
warning indicator. You can clear the
information display warning but the warning
indicator remains illuminated.
179
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
When you remove a blockage, you can reset
the system two ways:
• While driving, the system detects at least
two objects.
• You cycle the ignition from on to off and
then back on.
If the blockage is still present after the key
cycle and driving in traffic, check again for a
blockage.
Reasons for messages being displayed
Clean the fascia area in front
of the radar or remove the
obstruction.
The radar
surface is
dirty or
obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for a
few minutes to allow the
radar to detect passing
vehicles so it can clear the
blocked state.
The radar
surface is
not dirty or
obstructed
No action required. The
system automatically resets
to an unblocked state once
the rainfall or snowfall rate
decreases or stops. Do not
use BLIS or Cross Traffic Alert
in these conditions.
Heavy rain-
fall or snow-
fall inter-
feres with
the radar
signals
System Limitations
The Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert systems do have their limitations;
situations such as severe weather conditions
or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Blind Spot Information System:
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering
and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at very fast rates.
• When several vehicles forming a convoy
pass through the blind zone.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert system:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a factory equipped
tow bar and it is towing a trailer, the sensors
detect the trailer and turn the Blind Spot
Information and Cross Traffic Alert systems
off to avoid false alerts. For non-factory
equipped tow bars, you may want to switch
the Blind Spot Information System off
manually.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by either the Blind Spot
Information or the Cross Traffic Alert systems
that illuminates the alert indicator with no
vehicle in the coverage zone. Some amount
of false alerts are normal; they are temporary
and self-correct.
System Errors
If either system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the Blind Spot Information
System telltale illuminates and a message
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 94).
All other system faults only display with a
message in the information display.
180
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
Switching the Systems Off and On
You can temporarily switch off one or both
systems in the information display. See
General Information (page 88). When you
switch off the Blind Spot Information System,
you do not receive alerts and the information
display shows a system off message. The
yellow alert indicator in the outside mirror
also flashes twice. The system turns back on
whenever you switch the ignition on.
You can also have one or both systems
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off, only an authorized
dealer can switch the system back on.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING
The electric power steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system. If a fault is
detected, a message displays in the
information display. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the ignition
off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the
ignition on and watch the information display
for a steering system warning message. If a
steering system warning message returns,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering seem
to wander or pull.
181
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
(If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’s
attention, and judgment, or the need to apply
the brakes. This system does NOT activate
the brakes automatically. Failure to press the
brake pedal to activate the brakes may result
in a collision.
WARNINGS
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent all
collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace driver judgment and the need to
maintain distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
E156130
This system is designed to alert the driver of
certain collision risks. A radar detects if your
vehicle is rapidly approaching another vehicle
traveling in the same direction as yours.
E156131
If it is, a red warning light illuminates and an
audible warning chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light illuminates,
the brake support prepares the brake system
for rapid braking. This may be apparent to
the driver. The system does not automatically
activate the brakes but, if the brake pedal is
pressed, full force braking is applied even if
the brake pedal is lightly pressed.
182
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the speed
at which a collision occurs if the driver
applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical braking
situation.
The warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible settings by
using the information display control. See
General Information (page 88).
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as
being too frequent or disturbing then the
warning sensitivity can be reduced, though the
manufacturer recommends using the highest
sensitivity setting where possible. Setting
lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later
system warnings. See General Information
(page 88).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the radar
signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower
grille. When the sensors are obstructed, a
vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the
collision warning system does not function.
The following table lists possible causes and
actions for this message being displayed.
183
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is no longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warning
should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather condi-
tions improve
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warning
should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather condi-
tions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the speed
at which a collision occurs if the driver
applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical braking
situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology, there
may be certain instances where vehicles do
not provide a collision warning. These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see blocked
sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to have
your collision warning radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
184
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
DRIVE CONTROL
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln Drive
Control will respond to your preferences
based on what gear position you select. This
provides a single location to control multiple
systems performance settings.
Lincoln Drive Control consists of the following
systems:
• Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock absorbers
stiffness in real time to match the road
surface and driver inputs. This system
continuously monitors your vehicle’s
motion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions, and
steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
• Active noise control utilizes your vehicle
electronics to enhance the acoustic
experience.
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving.
• Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.
Note: Active noise control is only available
with EcoBoost™ engines.
These systems have a range of modes which
you can choose from in order to customize
your ideal driving experience:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from a luxury vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control. The
engine responds more directly to your
inputs and takes on a more powerful
tone. Sport mode is ideal for use during
more spirited driving.
Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the Drive Control
modes are active when your vehicle is in Drive
(D) or in Sport (S). The configuration remains
active until modified from the main menu on
the information display.
To change your vehicle’s Drive Control
settings from the main menu on the
information display:
185
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
1. Choose Settings.
2. Choose Vehicle.
3. Choose Drive Control.
4. Select the shift position you would like to
configure, either D or S.
5. Choose from Comfort, Normal, or Sport
modes as your preferred setting in D.
6. Choose from Normal or Sport modes as
your preferred setting in S.
Settings in S:
• Handling in S - The suspension stiffens,
with an emphasis on handling and
control.
• Performance in S - The engine responds
more directly to your inputs and takes on
a more powerful tone.
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system
to ensure proper operation. Certain types of
system errors will gray out the mode selections
within the information display, preventing you
from changing states when the gear position
is changed. Other types of errors will produce
a temporary message that states Drive Control
Malfunction. If either condition persists for
multiple key cycles, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized dealer.
186
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Aids
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle, trailer
or both, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle
design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety
Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It
does not include passengers, cargo,
or optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized
dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door (vehicles exported outside the
US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED
WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED
XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
187
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
Tire Label is the maximum payload
for the vehicle as built by the
assembly plant. If you install any
aftermarket or authorized-dealer
installed equipment on the vehicle,
you must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can be
limited either by volume capacity
(how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight
the vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum payload
of your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute
to loss of vehicle control and vehicle
rollover.
188
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
Example only:
E142516
E142517
189
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight - includes all weight
added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional
equipment. When towing, trailer
tongue load or king pin weight is
also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the
total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be carried
by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position. The total load on
each axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer.
190
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - is
the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo,
plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
It is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position. The Gross Vehicle
Weight must never exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
191
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
Example only:
E142523
192
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
E142524
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could
result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine,
transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
193
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
E143819
GCW
GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus
the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle and
the loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle can
handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s
braking system is rated for operation
at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not
at Gross Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must
never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight
- is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. It assumes a vehicle with
mandatory options, driver and front
passenger weight (150 pounds [68
kilograms] each), no cargo weight
(internal or external) and a tongue
load of 10–15% (conventional
trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25%
(fifth wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at an
authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King
Pin Weight - refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes
down on a trailer hitch.
194
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
Examples: For a 5000 pound
(2268 kilogram) conventional
trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load
range of 500 to 750 pounds (227 to
340 kilograms). For an 11500 pound
(5216 kilogram) fifth wheel trailer,
multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain
a proper king pin load range of 1725
to 2875 pounds (782 to 1304
kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with
a higher limit than the original tires
do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
WARNINGS
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle
and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct
load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =
650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
195
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 - (5
x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150
= 150 pounds. Yes, you have enough
load capacity in your vehicle to
transport four friends and your golf
bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) =
635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and one
of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside
of the vehicle with the rear seat
folded down, you have room for
twelve 100-pound (45-kilogram)
bags of cement. Do you have
enough load capacity to transport
the cement to your home? If you
and your friend each weigh 220
pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not
have enough cargo capacity to carry
that much weight. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12
x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 =
-103 kilograms. You will need to
reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound
(45-kilogram) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:1400
- (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also assume
that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not
overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for
your vehicle on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
196
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and
Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, should be taken
when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo
and people than most passenger
cars. Depending upon the type and
placement of the load, hauling
cargo and people may raise the
center of gravity of the vehicle.
197
MKS (), enUSA
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of
your vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission
damage, structural damage, loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Note: There may be electrical items
such as fuses or relays that can affect
trailer towing operation. See Fuses
(page 218).
The load capacity of your vehicle is
designated by weight not volume.
You may not necessarily be able to
use all available space when loading
your vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places extra load
on the engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires, and suspension.
Inspect these components before,
during and after towing.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects the vehicle when
driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items in the
center of the left and right side
trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go above
or below 10-15% of the loaded
trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the correct
rise or drop. When both the
loaded vehicle and trailer are
connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly angled
down toward the vehicle, when
viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration or
shudder may be present due to the
increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is located
in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 187). You can also
find the information in the RV &
Trailer Towing Guide, available at
an authorized dealer.
198
MKS (), enUSA
Towing
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle configuration
listed in the chart below.
Note: Be sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area. Do
not exceed 12 feet
2
(1.11 meters
2
)
trailer frontal area.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)
starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a
specified weight. Be sure to check
state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer weights
listed may be limited to this specified
weight, as the vehicle’s electrical
system may not include the wiring
connector needed to use electric
trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a Class I trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart. If your vehicle is
equipped with 3.7L engine, it cannot
tow a trailer.
Maximum trailer weightPowertrain
No trailer towing permitted3.7L TiVCT front-wheel drive
No trailer towing permitted3.7L TiVCT all-wheel drive
1000 lb (454 kg)3.5L GTDI all-wheel drive
199
MKS (), enUSA
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 187).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your vehicle's
brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances
of having a collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance in
proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
200
MKS (), enUSA
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you
must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included
with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after
removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 inches (15 centimeters) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Any time the rear axle submerges in water,
replace the rear axle lubricant. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which is
not a normal maintenance inspection item
unless there is a possibility of a leak or other
axle repair is required.
201
MKS (), enUSA
Towing
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or, if
you are a member of a roadside assistance
program, your roadside assistance service
provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt
towing procedure. Vehicle damage may occur
if towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel drive
vehicle towed from the front if using proper
wheel lift equipment to raise the front wheels
off the ground. When towing in this manner,
the rear wheels can remain on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel
lift equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
Emergency Towing
You can flat-tow (all wheels on the ground,
regardless of the powertrain/transmission
configuration) your disabled vehicle (without
access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,
or flatbed transport vehicle) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward so you tow
it in a forward direction.
• You place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot place the transmission in
neutral (N), you may need to override it.
See Transmission (page 139).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).
202
MKS (), enUSA
Towing
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See Climate
Control (page 105).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome or truck. These
guidelines are to make sure you do not
damage your vehicle after it is hooked-up to
the recreational vehicle or tow dolly.
You can tow your front-wheel drive vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground or with the
front wheels off the ground by using a tow
dolly. If you are using a tow dolly, follow the
instructions specified by the equipment
provider. If you are towing with all four wheels
on the ground, see the following instructions.
You can tow your all-wheel drive vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. Do not tow your all-wheel
drive vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear
wheels on the ground. This causes damage
to your all-wheel drive system. If you are
using a vehicle transport trailer, follow the
instruction specified by the equipment
provider. If you are towing with all four wheels
on the ground, see the following instructions.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place the transmission in neutral (N).
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
• Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each day
and every six hours thereafter. With the
engine running and your foot on the brake,
shift into drive (D) and then into reverse
(R) before shifting back into neutral (N).
203
MKS (), enUSA
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit
some unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the gears
early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• When running errands, go to the
furthest destination first and then
work your way back home.
• Close the windows for high-speed driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds. (Traveling at
65 mph/105 kph uses about 15% less fuel
than traveling at 75 mph/121 kph).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want to
avoid doing because they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4
kilometers/liter] is lost for every 400 lbs
[180 kilograms] of weight carried).
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the front rocker
area of your vehicle.
204
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Hints
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your
brake performance and traction may be
limited. After driving through water and as
soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave
the pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor
mats that are firmly secured to retention
posts so that they cannot slip out of position
and interfere with the pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor mats
are properly attached to the retention
posts in the carpet that are supplied
with your vehicle. Floor mats must be
properly secured to both retention posts to
make sure mats do not shift out of position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to prevent
them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
WARNINGS
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on a
regular basis. Always properly reinstall
and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.
Always make sure that objects cannot
fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects that are
loose can become trapped under the pedals
causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment instructions
can potentially cause interference with
pedal operation causing a loss of vehicle
control.
205
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Hints
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
206
MKS (), enUSA
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
If you ever need help on the road, the Lincoln
Motor Company is there for you with
nationwide, 24-hours-a-day,
seven-days-a-week assistance.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000 mi
(112,654.08 km) (whichever comes first)
within the extended powertrain warranty
coverage period for subsequent owners.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
This complimentary Roadside Assistance
program is separate from the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and includes:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2.0 gal (7.5 L) of gasoline or 5.0 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.48 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (161 km)
of the disablement location or to the
nearest Lincoln dealer. If a client requests
a tow to a selling or preferred dealer that
is more than 100 mi (161 km) from the
disablement location, the client shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (161 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States Lincoln vehicle clients who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100 mi (161 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Lincoln vehicle
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Ford Motor
Company will ask you to submit your original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian clients who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-387-9333.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation
administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered services
in Canada or the continental United States.
Coverage extends to vehicles that use public,
non-seasonal, annually traveled roadways.
Roadside Assistance coverage does not
extend to vehicles involved in cross-country
207
MKS (), enUSA
Roadside Emergencies
driving, logging, autocross and any other form
of off-road use. Well maintained roads and
surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
Supplier, and allow their representatives to
perform service as per the standard operating
procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by
road to the nearest authorized dealership,
transportation by rail or water may be
necessary. The program covers a tow to the
dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip.
For rail or water transportation, however,
contact your authorized dealer to confirm if
you are eligible for additional coverage before
you authorize or pay for the service.
Call the Lincoln Roadside Assistance at
1-800-387-9333 for additional information.
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the United States coverage.
Please refer to your warranty information or
visit our website at www.lincolncanada.com
for information on Canadian services and
benefits.
Canadian clients who need to obtain roadside
information, call 1-800-387-9333 or visit our
website at www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will lose charge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is creating
a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision,
this vehicle includes a fuel pump shutoff
feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision,
you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles
equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the fuel
pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to start the
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the engine
by pressing the brake pedal and the
START/STOP button, or switch on the
ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without pressing
the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the
fuel system.
208
MKS (), enUSA
Roadside Emergencies
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart. Once
your vehicle determines that the systems are
safe, then the vehicle will allow you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not
restart after your third attempt, contact an
authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery can
explode if exposed to flames, sparks,
or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in personal injury or vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which
can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
Use only an adequate-sized cable with
insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of
the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch. Turn all accessories
off.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components as
grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts.
To avoid reverse polarity connections, make
sure that you correctly identify the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals on both the
disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
209
MKS (), enUSA
Roadside Emergencies
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the assisting
battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground connection
point if available.
WARNING
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (-) terminal of
the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that
surround the battery.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your engine
speed between 2000 and 3000 rpms, as
shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the jumper cable from the
ground metal surface or connecting point,
if available.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative
(-) terminal of the booster vehicle's
battery.
210
MKS (), enUSA
Roadside Emergencies
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle's battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started
and the jumper cables removed, allow it to
idle for several minutes so the battery can
recharge.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the turn signal lamps and
sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event
of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
(front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy)
or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the remote
entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
211
MKS (), enUSA
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While any
authorized dealer handling your vehicle line
will provide warranty service, we recommend
you return to your selling authorized dealer
who wants to ensure your continued
satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made
using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.lincolnowner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
212
MKS (), enUSA
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies, please
contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford
in writing before pursuing remedies under
your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state
replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount
equal to the actual price paid or payable by
the consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000
miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity at
the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
213
MKS (), enUSA
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights
and remedies not created by California Civil
Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two
parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the
claim. If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may reject
the decision and proceed to court where all
findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and
decision, are admissible in the court action.
Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO
LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the
decision, and must comply with the decision
within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance
letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right
to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process at
any time without notice and without
obligation.
214
MKS (), enUSA
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian
dealers. In those cases where you continue
to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and
the authorized dealer to resolve a
factory-related vehicle service concern have
been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation,
call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than
is recommended for your vehicle, contact our
Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without
proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford
of Canada is not responsible for any damage
caused by use of improper fuel. Using leaded
fuel may also result in difficulty importing
your vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are
traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth
of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI),
America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,
please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673).
215
MKS (), enUSA
Customer Assistance
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are
traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact the
nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are
traveling or living in the Middle East, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait:
24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations & Global Growth
Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’ s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll
free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from
your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm,
Incorporated using the contact information
listed previously in this section.
216
MKS (), enUSA
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform
Transport Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htmWebsite
1–800–333–0510Phone
217
MKS (), enUSA
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
WARNINGS
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the power
distribution box before reconnecting
the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect the vehicle's main electrical systems
from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the battery,
you will need to reset some features. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 248).
E173618
97
98
77
96
95
94
93 92 91 90 89
88
66
44
78
56
39
26
18 1617
3 12456789
192021222324
2728293031
40414243
55
575859606162636465
798081828384858687
67
45
32
10111213
333435
464748495051
6869707172
74
73
76
75
53
37 36
54
38
25
15
14
52
218
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-1
Not used.-2
Not used.-3
Wiper motor relay.
30A
2
4
Anti-lock brake system pump.
50A
2
5
Not used.-6
Not used.-7
Moonroof, power sunshade.
20A
2
8
Second row power point.
20A
2
9
Not used.-10
Heated rear window relay.-11
Not used.-12
Starter motor relay.-13
Left-hand cooling fan number 2 relay.-14
Fuel pump relay.-15
Not used.-16
219
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-17
Front blower motor relay.
40A
2
18
Starter relay.
30A
2
19
Storage bin power point.
20A
2
A
20
Rear heated seat module.
20A
2
21
Massage control seats relay.-22
Driver power seat.
30A
2
23
Memory module.
Not used.-24
Not used.-25
Heated rear window relay.
40A
2
26
Cigar lighter.
20A
2
27
Climate controlled seats.
30A
2
28
Electric fan relay 1.
40A
2
29
Electric fan relay 2.
40A
2
30
220
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Electric fan relay 3.
25A
2
31
Not used.-32
Right-hand cooling fan relay.-33
Blower motor relay.-34
Left-hand cooling fan Number 1 relay.-35
Not used.-36
Not used.-37
Not used.-38
Not used.-39
Left front smart window motor.
30A
2
40
Left rear smart window motor.
30A
2
41
Passenger power seat.
30A
2
42
Anti-lock brake system valves.
20A
2
43
Not used.-44
Rain sensor.
5A
1
45
Not used.-46
221
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-47
Not used.-48
Not used.-49
Heated Mirrors.
15A
1
50
Not used.-51
Not used.-52
Not used.-53
Not used.-54
Wiper relay.-55
Not used.-56
Left-hand high intensity discharge headlamp.
20A
1
57
Alternator A-line.
10A
1
58
Brake on/off switch.
10A
1
59
Not used.-60
Not used.-61
A/C clutch relay.-62
222
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-63
Massage control seats.
15A
1
64
Fuel pump relay.
30A
1
65
Fuel injectors.
Powertrain control module relay.-66
Oxygen sensor heater.
20A
1
67
Mass airflow sensor.
Variable camshaft timing solenoid valve.
Canister vent solenoid.
Canister purge solenoid.
Ignition coils.
20A
1
68
Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control module).
20A
1
69
A/C clutch.
15A
1
70
Fan control relay coils 1-3).
Variable air conditioning compressor.
Auxiliary transmission warmup.
Turbo charge waste-gate control.
223
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Electronic compressor bypass valve.
All-wheel drive module.
Positive crankcase ventilation heater.
Not used.-71
Not used.-72
Not used.-73
Not used.-74
Not used.-75
Not used.-76
Not used.-77
Right high-intensity discharge headlamp.
20A
1
78
Adaptive cruise control module
5A
1
79
Not used.-80
Not used.-81
Not used.-82
Not used.-83
Not used.-84
224
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-85
Powertrain control module.
7.5A
1
86
Keep alive power and relay.
Canister vent solenoid.
Run/start relay.
5A
1
87
Run/start relay.-88
Front blower relay coil.
5A
1
89
Electrical power assist steering module.
Powertrain control module run/start.
10A
1
90
Adaptive cruise control module.
10A
1
91
Anti-lock brake system module.
10A
1
92
Adaptive headlamp module.
Rear window defroster relay.
5A
1
93
Passenger compartment fuse panel run/start.
30A
2
94
Not used.-95
Not used.-96
225
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-97
Not used.-98
1
Mini Fuses
2
Cartridge Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel. You may
need to remove a trim panel to access it.
226
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
E173619
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22 33 41
42
43
44
45
34
35
36
37
23
24
25
26
27
28 38 46
39 4729
32
40
31
30
48
49
227
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Left front and right rear smart window motors.30A1
Driver seat switch.15A2
Right front smart window motor.30A3
Demand lamps battery saver relay.10A4
Audio amplifier20A5
Active noise control module.
Not used (spare).5A6
Driver seat module logic.7.5A7
Left front door zone module.
Keypad.
Not used (spare).10A8
SYNC module.10A9
Electronic finish panel.
Radio frequency transceiver module.
Run accessory relay.10A10
Wiper relay.
Rain-sense subfuse.
Intelligent access module logic.10A11
Heads-up display.
Puddle lamp.15A12
228
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Backlighting LED.
Interior lighting.
Right-hand direction indicators.15A13
Left-hand direction indicators.15A14
Stop lamp.15A15
Backup lamp.
Right front low beam.10A16
Left front low beam.10A17
Start button.10A18
Keypad illumination.
Brake-shift interlock.
Powertrain control module wake-up.
Immobilizer transceiver module.
Audio amplifiers.20A19
All lock motor relay and coil.20A20
Driver lock motor relay and coil.
Not used (spare).10A21
Horn relay.20A22
Steering wheel control module logic15A23
Instrument cluster.
Steering wheel control module.15A24
229
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Datalink.
Decklid release.15A25
Push button ignition switch.5A26
Intelligent access module power.20A27
Not used (spare).15A28
Radio.20A29
Global positioning system module
Front park lamps.15A30
Not used (spare).5A31
Smart window motors.15A32
Master window and mirror switch.
Rear window power sunshade module.
Lock switch illumination.
Suspension module.10A33
Reverse park aid module.10A34
Automatic high beam and lane departure module.
Rear heated seat module.
Blind spot monitor module.
Rear video camera.
Motorized humidity sensor.5A35
Heads-up display.
230
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Heated steering wheel.10A36
Not used (spare).10A37
Moonroof module and switch.10A38
High beams.15A39
Rear park lamps.10A40
Occupant classification sensor.7.5A41
Restraint control module.
Not used (spare).5A42
Not used (spare).10A43
Not used (spare).10A44
Not used (spare).5A45
Climate control module.10A46
Fog lamp relay.15A47
Front passenger power window.30A Circuit breaker48
Rear power windows.
231
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that has
the specified amperage rating. Using a
fuse with a higher amperage rating can
cause severe wire damage and could start a
fire.
E142430
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
Color
J-type fusesM-type fusesDual micro fusesMicro fusesFuse rating
--TanTan5A
--BrownBrown7.5A
--RedRed10A
-GreyBlueBlue15A
BlueLight Blue-Yellow20A
WhiteWhite-White25A
PinkPink-Green30A
232
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
Color
J-type fusesM-type fusesDual micro fusesMicro fusesFuse rating
GreenGreen--40A
Red---50A
Yellow---60A
233
MKS (), enUSA
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized dealers
that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide
scheduled maintenance information which
makes tracking routine service easy. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 392).
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
E166491
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
E173323
234
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and locate
the secondary release lever. The release
lever is located below the grille.
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
yellow secondary release lever to the
left-hand side of your vehicle.
4. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold
it open.
5. To close, lower the hood and make sure
that you close the hood properly and fully
latch it.
235
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 239).C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 247).D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 248).E.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 218).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 255).G.
Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 244).H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 248).I.
237
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 239).C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 247).D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 248).E.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 218).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 255).G.
Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 244).H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 248).I.
Engine Shield
E173374
Some vehicles may be equipped with an
aero-shield under the engine. This shield
needs to be removed for service, including oil
and filter changes. The shield has four
quick-release fasteners to secure it in place.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the
gearshift is in park (P).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from
engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine
oil level dipstick. See Under Hood
Overview (page 236).
239
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick
fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is between the lower
and upper holes, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the lower hole,
add enough oil to raise the level within
the lower and upper holes.
• Oil levels above the upper hole may
cause engine damage. Some oil must
be removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the oil level dipstick back into the oil
dipstick tube and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the
engine is running.
Note: Do not remove the engine oil level
dipstick when the engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). An
oil with this trademark symbol conforms to
the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC),
comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 290).
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use
a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
4. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure
the oil level is not above the normal
operating range on the engine oil level
dipstick.
5. Install the engine oil level dipstick and
ensure it is fully seated.
6. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by
turning the filler cap clockwise until three
clicks are heard or until the cap is fully
seated.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
To reset the oil monitoring system after an
oil change, See General Information (page
88).
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.
240
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see through
the windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief
cap. The cooling system is under pressure.
Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully
when you loosen the cap slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine coolant
at the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 392).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration
should be tested with a refractometer such as
Robinair Coolant and Battery Refractometer
75240. We do not recommend the use of
hydrometers or coolant test strips for
measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can cause
damage to the engine cooling or heating
systems. Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from orange
to pink or light red.
As long as the engine coolant is clear and
uncontaminated, this color change does not
indicate that the engine coolant has
degraded, nor does it require that qualified
personnel drain the engine coolant, flush the
system or replace the engine coolant.
Do not mix different colors or types of coolant
in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may
harm your engine’s cooling system. The use
of an improper coolant may harm engine and
cooling system components and may void
the warranty. Use prediluted engine coolant
meeting the Ford specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 290).
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System
Flush.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
241
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the
coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will
escape as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the Ford specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 290).
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive your
vehicle.
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant level
to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend
the use of recycled engine coolant since a
Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of
in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% provides
improved freeze point protection. Engine
coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% provides
improved overheat protection. Engine
coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If you deplete the engine coolant supply,
fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before you incur
incremental component damage. The
fail-safe distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to the
red (hot) area and:
242
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
the coolant temperature warning
light will illuminate
the service engine soon indicator
will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• This will disable the air conditioning
system.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start your engine. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your vehicle
in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have
limited power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may completely
shut down without warning, potentially losing
engine power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may increase the
possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap
while the engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine will
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.
5. Re-start the engine and drive your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine Fluid Temperature Management
(If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed may
reduce and the vehicle may not be able
to accelerate with full power until the fluid
temperatures reduce.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap
while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but because
of the added load, your vehicle’s engine may
temporarily reach higher temperatures during
severe operating conditions such as
ascending a long or steep grade while pulling
a trailer in high temperatures.
243
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
At this time, you may notice your engine
coolant temperature gauge needle move
toward the H and the POWER REDUCED
TO LOWER TEMP message may appear in
the information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed
caused by reduced engine power. In order to
manage the engine fluid temperatures, your
vehicle may enter this mode if certain
high-temperature and high-load conditions
take place. The amount of speed reduction
depends on many factors such as vehicle
loading, towing, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no need
to pull off the road. You can continue to drive
your vehicle while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and
off during severe operating conditions to
protect overheating of the engine. When the
engine coolant temperature decreases to a
normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the
coolant temperature warning or service
engine soon messages appear in your
information display:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
P.
2. Leave the engine running until the coolant
temperature gauge needle moves away
from the red (hot) area. After several
minutes, if the temperature does not
drop, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is normal, restart your
engine and continue.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, and
restart the engine. See Adding Engine
Coolant or How Fail-Safe Cooling
Works in this chapter for more
information.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
6F50/6F55 Transmission (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The dipstick cap and surrounding
components may be hot, use gloves.
Use gloves when moving the air filter
assembly. Components will be hot.
Note: Automatic transmission fluid expands
when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid
check, drive your vehicle until you warm it up,
approximately 20 mi (30 km). If you operate
your vehicle for an extended period at high
speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or
pulling a trailer, switch your vehicle off until it
reaches normal operating temperatures to
allow the fluid to cool before checking.
Depending on vehicle use, cooling times could
take up to 30 minutes or longer.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission does
not consume fluid. However, you should
check the fluid level if the transmission is not
working properly. For example, if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of a fluid leak.
1. Drive your vehicle 20 mi (30 km) or until
it reaches normal operating temperature.
2. Park your vehicle on a level surface and
engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your
foot on the brake pedal, start the engine
and move the gearshift lever through all
of the gear ranges. Allow a minimum of
10 seconds for each gear to engage.
4. Put the gearshift lever in park (P) and
leave the engine running.
244
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
Note: For vehicles with the EcoBoost engine,
move the air filter assembly aside to access
the transmission dipstick. See Moving the Air
Filter Assembly for more information.
5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean
with a dry, lint free clean rag. If necessary,
refer to the Under hood overview in this
chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure you fully
seat it in the filler tube by turning it to the
locked position.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid
level. The fluid should be in the
designated areas for normal operating
temperature.
Moving the Air Filter Assembly
(Accessing the Dipstick)
WARNING
Do not run engine with the air filter
disconnected.
1. Switch the engine off.
E173335
2
3
2. Clean the area around the clamp that
connects the air filter assembly to the
rubber hose and then loosen it.
3. Remove the bolt cover.
E173334
6
5
4
4. Remove two bolts that attach the air filter
assembly to the front of the vehicle.
5. Remove the harness retaining clip by
pulling up.
6. Do not disconnect the sensor.
245
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
E173400
7. Pull the air filter assembly up to
disconnect it from the seated grommets
located under the air filter assembly.
8. Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees
counterclockwise. Make sure the rubber
hose is still connected to the air filter
assembly.
9. Tighten the clamp.
You can now access the transmission fluid
level indicator.
Checking the fluid level
Low fluid level
E158842
If the fluid level is below the MIN range of the
dipstick, add fluid to reach the hash mark
level.
Note: If the fluid level is below the MIN level,
do not drive the vehicle. An underfill condition
may cause shift or engagement concerns or
possible damage.
Correct fluid level
E158843
Check the transmission fluid at the normal
operating temperatures between 180°F
(82°C) and 200°F (93°C) on a level surface.
Drive your vehicle until you warm it up to the
normal operating temperature after
approximately 20 mi (30 km).
Target the transmission fluid level within the
cross-hatch area if at the normal operating
temperature between 180°F (82°C) and
200°F (93°C).
High fluid level
E158844
If the fluid level is above the MAX range of
the dipstick, remove fluid to reach the
hashmark level.
246
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
Note: Fluid level above the MAX level may
cause shift or engagement concerns or
possible damage. An overheating condition
can cause high fluid levels. If you operate your
vehicle for an extended period at high speeds,
in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a
trailer, you should switch your vehicle off until
your vehicle reaches normal operating
temperatures. Depending on vehicle use,
cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or
longer.
Adjusting Automatic Transmission Fluid
Levels
E158845
E158846
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct
type is used. The type of fluid used is
normally indicated on the dipstick and in the
Technical Specifications section in this
chapter.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift or engagement concerns
or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
Reinstall the air filter assembly. After you
check the fluid level and adjust as necessary,
do the following:
1. Switch the engine off.
2. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
3. Seat the air filter assembly back into the
grommets by pushing down on the air
filter assembly.
4. Tighten the clamp.
5. Install and tighten the two bolts that
attach the air filter assembly to the front
of the vehicle.
6. Install the bolt cover.
7. Reinstall the harness retaining clip into
the front of the air filter assembly.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines
are within the normal operating range; there
is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range, the
performance of the system could be
compromised; seek service from your
authorized dealer immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
247
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 290).
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases that can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the
battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your
eyes. Always provide proper ventilation.
This vehicle may be equipped with
more than one battery, removal of
cable from only one battery does not
disconnect your vehicle electrical system. Be
sure to disconnect cables from all batteries
when disconnecting power. Failure to do so
may cause serious personal injury or property
damage.
WARNINGS
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the
battery to protect against possible splashing
of acid solution. In case of acid contact with
skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call
a physician immediately.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make
sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been
cleaned or replaced.
Note: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or
components added to your vehicle by the
dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
248
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during its
life of service.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make
certain the battery cables are always tightly
fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery
cable terminal be disconnected from the
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
an extended period of time.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically
controlled by a computer, some control
conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. When the battery is disconnected or
a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for
optimum driveability and performance.
Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn
the ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance. To begin this
process:
1. With your vehicle at a complete stop, set
the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P(Park), turn off all
accessories.
3. Start the engine. Run the engine until it
reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
5. Turn the air conditioning on and allow the
engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot
on the brake pedal and with the air
conditioning on, put your vehicle in D
(Drive) and allow the engine to idle for at
least one minute.
• If you do not allow the engine to
relearn its idle trim, the idle quality of
your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
7. Drive your vehicle to complete the
relearning process
• Your vehicle may need to be driven 10
miles (16 kilometers) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy
along with the ethanol content for
flexible fuel vehicles.
• For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience
poor starts or an inability to start the
engine and driveability problems until
the fuel trim and ethanol content
have been relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new
battery has been installed, the clock and
radio settings must be reset once the battery
is reconnected.
249
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
Always dispose of automotive batteries
in a responsible manner. Follow your
local authorized standards for disposal.
Call your local authorized recycling
center to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system (BMS)
monitors battery conditions and takes
actions to extend battery life. If excessive
battery drain is detected, the system may
temporarily disable certain electrical features
to protect the battery. Those electrical
accessories affected include the rear defrost,
heated/cooled seats, climate control fan,
heated steering wheel, audio and navigation
system. A message may be shown in the
information displays to alert the driver that
battery protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.
Electrical accessory installation
To ensure proper operation of the Battery
Management System, any electrical devices
that are added to your vehicle should not
have their ground connection made directly
at the negative battery post. A connection at
the negative battery post can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories
added to your vehicle by the dealer or the
owner, may adversely affect battery
performance and durability, and may affect
the performance of other electrical systems
in your vehicle.
When a battery replacement is required, the
battery should only be replaced with a
Ford-recommended replacement battery
that matches the electrical requirements of
your vehicle. After battery replacement, or in
some cases after charging the battery with
the external charger, the Battery
Management System requires eight hours of
vehicle sleep time (key off with doors closed)
to relearn the new battery state of charge.
Prior to relearning the state of charge, the
Battery Management System may disable
electrical features (to protect the battery)
earlier than normal.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
The wiper arms can be manually moved
when the ignition is off. This allows for ease
of blade replacement and cleaning under the
blades.
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from
the glass.
250
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
E129990
1
1
2
2. Press the locking buttons together.
3. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when the ignition is turned on.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year
for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly
aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, have the alignment
of your headlamps checked by your
authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a 3.0
millimeter circle on the lens) to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light from
one headlamp while adjusting the other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so
no light hits the wall.
251
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
E142465
4. There is a distinct cut-off (change from
light to dark) in the left portion of the
beam pattern. Position the top edge of
this cut-off 2 inches (5 centimeters)
below the horizontal reference line.
E167359
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a Phillips #2 screwdriver
to turn the adjuster either clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the vertical
aim of the headlamp. The horizontal edge
of the brighter light should touch the
horizontal reference line.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle
and is not adjustable.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate
normal changes in pressure. Condensation
can be a natural by-product of this design.
When moist air enters the lamp assembly
through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the
temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can
form on the interior of the lens. The thin mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation. Clearing time may
take as long as 48 hours under dry weather
conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually
caused by a lamp water leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or
streaks present on the interior of the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any
of the above conditions of unacceptable
moisture are present.
Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs
The headlamps on your vehicle use a high
intensity discharge source. These lamps
operate at a high voltage. See an authorized
dealer.
252
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
Replacing Front Parking, Direction
Indicator and Sidemarker Bulbs
These lamps are designed with LED light
sources. See an authorized dealer.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If
Equipped)
E163826
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from
the fog lamp bulb.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it from the fog lamp.
4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Brake, Tail, Rear Direction
Indicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs
These lamps are designed with LED light
sources. See an authorized dealer.
Replacing High-mount Brake Lamp
Bulbs
These lamps are designed with LED light
sources. See an authorized dealer.
Replacing the License Plate Lamp
Bulb
1. Make sure the lighting control switch is in
the off position.
E178598
2. Remove the screws and lens from the
license plate lamp assembly.
E178599
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight out from
the lamp assembly.
Install new bulb in reverse order.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
The specified replacement bulbs are in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T.
(Department of Transportation) for North
America to affirm lamp performance, light
brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The
correct bulbs will not damage the lamp
assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
253
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
Trade numberFunction
D3S* Headlamp (high intensity discharge) Low and High
LED* Sidemarker - front
LED* Park lamp - front
7444NA* Turn lamp - front
LEDSignal indicator mirror lamp
LEDApproach lamp
LED* Tail and brake lamp
LED* Turn lamp - rear
LED* Backup lamp
W5WLicense plate lamp
LED* High-mount brake lamp
W5WInterior lamps
* To replace these lamps, see an authorized dealer.
To replace instrument panel lights, see an authorized dealer.
254
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
or personal burn injuries, do not start
your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it when the
engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use only
the air filter element listed. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 290).
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles, when
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 392).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine damage.
The customer warranty may be void for any
damage to the engine if the correct air filter
element is not used.
3.5L EcoBoost Engine
E173520
3.7L Engine
E173521
1. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful
not to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover.
This could cause filter damage and allow
unfiltered air to enter the engine if not
properly seated.
255
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clamps to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
256
MKS (), enUSA
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
• Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
• Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
(ZC-15)
• Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
• Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
• Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
• Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
• Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A,
B, D or F)]
• Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B2)
• Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
• Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-56)
• Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.
only) (ZC-14)
• Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
• Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when is hot to
the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash the affected area as soon as possible.
257
MKS (), enUSA
Vehicle Care
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended cleaners
can result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they can
scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure
sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes and
graphics. This can damage them and cause
the edges to peel away from the vehicle
surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight. Always
wash your vehicle before applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
258
MKS (), enUSA
Vehicle Care
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to
clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid
could penetrate the sealed parts and
cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is
hot or running; water in the running engine
may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark
plug wire or spark plug well, or the area
in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from the
inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle
warranty does not cover damage caused to
the heated rear window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or
dye on the vehicle’s safety belts, as
these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
259
MKS (), enUSA
Vehicle Care
• If grease or tar is present on the material,
spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft
Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products
or glass cleaners, which can stain and
discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or strong
detergents when cleaning the steering
wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning
leather seats for cleaning leather instrument
panels and leather interior trim surfaces. See
Cleaning Leather Seats (page 260).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. If
a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Your
warranty may not cover these damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been
spilled on the instrument panel or on interior
trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning
leather seats for cleaning leather instrument
panels and leather interior trim surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a
soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
260
MKS (), enUSA
Vehicle Care
For cleaning and removing spots and stains
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on an
inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
Note: Do not use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner ZC-56 on Lincoln Black
Label, Presidential or Reserve Leathers
because it can damage those and other
semi-aniline leather seating fabrics. It can also
damage surround microfiber accent surfaces.
To clean Lincoln Black Label, Presidential or
Reserve Leathers, first vacuum the seats to
remove loose dirt. Then wipe the leather with
a clean soft cloth dampened with lukewarm
water and a mild soap. Wiper the leather again
with a slightly damp cloth to remove soap
residue, and dry with a soft cloth. To maintain
the leather's resiliency, it should be cleaned
whenever soiled.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots,
road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may cause
damage to the finish on your wheel rims and
covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or
high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool,
fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few
minutes before doing so. This will reduce the
risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
261
MKS (), enUSA
Vehicle Care
• Clean the wheels weekly using Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply using
manufacturer's instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits
of dirt and brake dust accumulation.
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of
water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days
or more, read the following maintenance
recommendations to make sure your vehicle
stays in good operating condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require
regular maintenance to protect against
rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal operating
temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirm
that there are no cooling system leaks
and that fluid is at the recommended
level.
262
MKS (), enUSA
Vehicle Care
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory features
if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
263
MKS (), enUSA
Vehicle Care
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire
Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200 Traction
AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They
do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires, space-saver
or temporary use spare tires, light
truck or LT type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades
exactly as the government has
written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1 ½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics
and climate.
264
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the
tire’ s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required
by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
• Tire Identification Number: A
number on the sidewall of each
tire providing information about
the tire brand and manufacturing
plant, tire size and date of
manufacture. Also referred to as
DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
265
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
• Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or
36 (2.5 bar) depending on tire
size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure
will not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry
a heavier maximum load at 42
psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the
inflation pressure beyond this
pressure will not increase the
tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven
for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door
• Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the
fundamental characteristics of the
tire and also provides a U.S. DOT
Tire Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case of
a recall.
266
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed rating.
The definitions of these items are
listed below. (Note that the tire size,
load index and speed rating for your
vehicle may be different from this
example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association, that
may be used for service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and
light trucks. Note: If your tire size
does not begin with a letter this may
mean it is designated by either the
European Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In
general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of height
to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index.
It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You
may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a
local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it is
not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to
be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of
load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at
different conditions for load and
inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for
the difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph (130
km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).
These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
267
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it is
not required by federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes
use the letters ZR. For those with a
maximum speed capability over 186
mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers
always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the
tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week
of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go
to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the
tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel, nylon,
polyester, and others.
268
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets
the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the
correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
269
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
• Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as
well on the government course
as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test
wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or
the pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than the
vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load or
radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires; these differences are
described below.
270
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at
psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear axle
(a total of six or more tires on the
vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the
rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In
general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of height
to width. Numbers of 70 or lower
indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
271
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing
tire inflation pressure by tire size and
other important information located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can
lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if equipped).
Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather
than a stick-type tire pressure
gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup
and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire
stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can
lose up to half of its air pressure and
not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum
inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended
tire inflation pressure is found on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
272
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’ s door. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear
patterns and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets
the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door. The cold inflation pressure
should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F (6°C)
temperature drop can cause a
corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa)
in inflation pressure. Check your tire
pressures frequently and adjust
them to the proper pressure which
can be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example driven more than 1 mile [1.6
kilometers]), never bleed or reduce
air pressure. The tires are hot from
driving and it is normal for pressures
to increase above recommended
cold pressures. A hot tire at or below
recommended cold inflation pressure
could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance
to get air for your tire(s), check and
record the tire pressure first and add
the appropriate air pressure when you
get to the pump. It is normal for tires
to heat up and the air pressure inside
to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
273
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck
the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for a
description. Store and maintain at 60
psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and
dissimilar spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a
description. Store and maintain at
the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make
sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could
poke a hole in the tire and cause
an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel
Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails
or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and
valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and
repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire
sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or
excessive wear. If internal damage
to the tire is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because
they are more likely to blow out or
fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare, frequently,
and replace them if one or more of
the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
274
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which look
like narrow strips of smooth rubber
across the tread will appear on the
tire when the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these wear bars,
the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall).
If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire
professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection
after off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage conditions,
and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure) the tires
experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced
after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging
process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it
has not been used.
275
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the
fundamental characteristics of the
tire and also provides a U.S. DOT
Tire Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case of
a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant
code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the
tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week
of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go
to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus LT-metric
or all-season versus all-terrain) as
those originally provided by Ford.
The recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which is
WARNINGS
located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver’s door. If this information
is not found on these labels then
you should contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended
by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer
unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
276
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed below.
If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure
on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
WARNINGS
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet
(3.66 meters) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer
or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of
12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the
wheel and tire assembly
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires generally
be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be
used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the operation
of your tire pressure monitoring
system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire pressure
monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud or sand, do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can
tear the tire and cause an explosion.
A tire can explode in as little as three
to five seconds.
277
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Do not spin the wheels at over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires
may fail and injure a passenger or
bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to
do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This
may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been
damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you
can safely pull off the road. Stop
and inspect the tires for damage. If
a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel (if provided). If you cannot
detect a cause, have the vehicle
towed to the nearest repair facility
or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end of
your vehicle to become misaligned
or cause damage to your tires. If
your vehicle seems to pull to one
side when you’re driving, the wheels
may be out of alignment. Have an
authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or
the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should
be corrected by an authorized
dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles
and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may
require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
278
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly is defined as a
spare wheel and tire assembly that
is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly it is intended
for temporary use only and should
not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle
requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as indicated
in the Scheduled Maintenance
chapter) will help your tires wear
more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Front-wheel drive and all-wheel
drive vehicles (front tires on the left
side of the diagram)
E142547
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNINGS
If you choose to install snow tires on
your vehicle, they must be the same
size, construction, and load range as
the original tires listed on the tire placard, and
they must be installed on all four wheels.
Mixing tires of different size or construction
on your vehicle can adversely affect your
vehicle's handling and braking, and may lead
to loss of vehicle control.
WARNINGS
Do not use snow chains or cables on
this vehicle as they may cause damage
to your vehicle which may lead to loss
of vehicle control.
Snow chains have not been approved for use
on your vehicle.
The original equipment tires on your vehicle
may have an all-weather tread design to
provide traction, handling, and braking
performance in year-round driving. You may
install snow tires for improved traction when
driving in areas with sustained periods of
snow or icy driving conditions.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system is
not a substitute for manually checking
tire pressure. The tire pressure should
be checked periodically (at least monthly)
using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in
this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
279
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale
will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies
with part 15 of the FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
280
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel and
tire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem. The pressure
sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. Take care when
changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly
low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires
are under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a short
time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire pressure
monitoring system, have the damaged road
wheel and tire assembly repaired and
remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
281
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
282
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off
after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase
about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from a cold
start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature
significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease
about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C)
in ambient temperature. This lower pressure
value may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or
more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is
under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to
the nearest location where air can be added
to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used.
The tire pressure monitoring system sensor
and valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized dealer after use of
the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 279).
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of the
monitoring system, all road wheels equipped
with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be
mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply
the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease
your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side
of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the tire
pressure monitoring system sensors. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page
279). Replace the spare tire with a road tire
as soon as possible. During repairing or
replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized
dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
283
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle
with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability (if
applicable).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle
with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability (if
applicable).
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable).
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
284
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off the
ground, the transmission alone will not
prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission
is in park (P).
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be sure
to place the transmission in park (P),
set the parking brake and block (in both
directions) the wheel that is diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the vehicle)
to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack. If the vehicle
slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNINGS
Always use the jack provided as original
equipment with your vehicle. If using a
jack other than the one provided as
original equipment with your vehicle, make
sure the jack capacity is adequate for the
vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo
or modifications.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E173211
3. Lift the trunk cargo cover, and remove the
wing nut that secures the spare tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
4. Lift and remove the spare tire from the
trunk.
285
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
5. Remove the second wing nut that secures
the jack retention bracket by turning it
counterclockwise. Then remove the jack
kit from your vehicle.
6. Remove the jack and the wrench from
the felt bag. Fold down the wrench socket
used to loosen the lug nuts and to
operate the jack.
Vehicle Jacking
E142551
1. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
2. If your vehicle has wheel covers, remove
them with the lug wrench tip and loosen
each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise. Do not remove them
until the wheel is raised off the ground.
3. The vehicle jacking points are shown here,
and are depicted on the warning label on
the jack.
E145908
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
4. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills
show the location of the jacking points.
E142553
5. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
6. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully
tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
7. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
8. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown. See Technical
Specifications (page 288).
286
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
9. Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench
away. Make sure the jack is fastened so
it does not rattle when you drive. Unblock
the wheels.
Stowing the flat tire
1. Remove the extension bolt from the
exterior pocket of the felt bag.
E173212
2. Insert the straight end of the jack
retention bracket through the eyelet of
the angled bracket and swing the
retention bracket over the jack. With the
jack in place, place the end of the
retention bracket over the threaded stud
in the trunk floor and secure it with the
plastic wing nut.
3. Screw the extension bolt onto the
threaded stud of the jack retention
bracket.
E173213
4. Place the flat tire in the spare tire well
with the wheel facing up.
5. Safely secure the wheel by screwing the
large wing nut onto the extension bolt.
Note: If you are stowing the temporary spare
tire, place the tire over the jack and secure it
with the large wing nut.
287
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the
hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting
in loss of control.
Ib-ft (Nm)
*
Bolt size
100 (135)1/2 x 20
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing
a flat tire, wheel removal).
288
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
289
MKS (), enUSA
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
3.7 V63.5L V6 EcoboostEngine
226214Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneMinimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-4-2-5-3-61-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugCoil on plugIgnition system
.049-.053 in. (1.25-1.35 mm).030-.033 in. (.75-.85 mm)Spark plug gap
10.5:110.0:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
3.5L and 3.7L V6 Ecoboost Engines with
A/C
E146428
290
MKS (), enUSA
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
3.7L V6 engine3.5L V6 EcoboostComponent
FA-1884FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SFL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-650BXT-65-650Battery
SP-520/CYFS-12F-5SP-534/CYFS-12-YT3Spark plugs
WW-2601-PF (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2001-PF (passenger side)
FP68FP68Cabin air filter
FS-104FS-104Seat air filter
We recommend Motorcraft replacement
parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance.
These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered
for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use
an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs
at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 392).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
291
MKS (), enUSA
Capacities and Specifications
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body typeC
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch, next
to the driver's seating position.
292
MKS (), enUSA
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The following
table shows the transmission code along with
the transmission description.
CodeDescription
JSix-speed automatic transmission (6F50)
CSix-speed automatic transmission (6F55)
293
MKS (), enUSA
Capacities and Specifications
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
Ford part number / Ford specificationRecommended fluids and
lubricants
CapacityItem
XL-1 (U.S.) / --
Motorcraft Penetrating and
Lock Lubricant (U.S.)
—Lock cylinders
CXC-51-A (Canada) / --
Motorcraft Penetrating Fluid
(Canada)
XL-5
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Grease Spray
—
Hinges, latches, striker plates,
fuel filler door hinge and seat
tracks
PM-20 / WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High
Performance Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid
reservoir
Brake fluid
1
XO-5W30-QSP or XO-5W30-QFS (U.S.)
/ WSS-M2C946-A
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30
Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil or Motorcraft SAE 5W-30
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
6.0 qt (5.7 L)3.5L EcoBoost engine oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12 or CXO-5W30-LFS12
(Canada) / WSS-M2C946-A
294
MKS (), enUSA
Capacities and Specifications
Ford part number / Ford specificationRecommended fluids and
lubricants
CapacityItem
XO-5W20-QSP or XO-5W20-QFS (U.S.)
/ WSS-M2C945-A
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil or Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
6.0 qt (5.7 L)3.7L engine oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12 or CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada) / WSS-M2C945-A
VC-3DIL-B (U.S.) / WSS-M97B44-D2
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/
Coolant Prediluted
11.4 qt (10.8 L)
3.5L EcoBoost engine coolant
2
CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) / WSS-M97B44-
D2
VC-3DIL-B (U.S.) / WSS-M97B44-D2
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/
Coolant Prediluted
11.1 qt (10.5 L)
3.7L engine coolant
2
CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) / WSS-M97B44-
D2
XY-80W90-QL (U.S.) / WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
2.4 pt (1.15L)Rear differential (AWD) fluid
CXY-80W90-1L (Canada) / WSP-M2C197-
A
XY-75W140-QL / WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
18 fl oz (0.53 L)
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
fluid (AWD)
3
XT-10-QLVC (U.S.);
Motorcraft MERCON LV
11.6 qt (11 L)
3.5L EcoBoost engine
CXT-10-LV12 (Canada) / MERCON LV
Automatic transmission fluid
4,5
10.9 qt (10.3 L)3.7L engine
295
MKS (), enUSA
Capacities and Specifications
Ford part number / Ford specificationRecommended fluids and
lubricants
CapacityItem
Automatic transmission fluid
4,5
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.) / WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft Premium Windshield
Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant (U.S.)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F) (Canada) / WSS-
M14P19-A
Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid (Canada)
——19.0 gal (71.9 L)Fuel tank
YN-19 (U.S.) / WSH-M17B19-A
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant1.63 lb (0.74 kg)
3.5L EcoBoost Engine A/C
refrigerant
CYN-16-R (Canada) / WSH-M17B19-A
YN-19 (U.S.) / WSH-M17B19-A
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant1.43 lb (0.65 kg)3.7L Engine A/C refrigerant
CYN-16-R (Canada) / WSH-M17B19-A
YN-12-D /
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant
Compressor Oil
5.2 fl oz (153.8 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
296
MKS (), enUSA
Capacities and Specifications
Ford part number / Ford specificationRecommended fluids and
lubricants
CapacityItem
WSH-M1C231-B
1
Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Contact an authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
4
Make sure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick blade or the dipstick
handle. Before adding, check the container to verify the fluid is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information to
determine the correct service interval.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV should only use MERCON LV fluid. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid
may cause transmission damage.
5
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. Use the
indication on the dipstick, showing the normal operating range, to determine the amount of transmission fluid and the fluid level.
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications. Motor oils of the recommended
viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines are also acceptable. Do not use oil
labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of the International
Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC):
297
MKS (), enUSA
Capacities and Specifications
E142732
298
MKS (), enUSA
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact discs
only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in Ford
CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on
your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact an authorized
dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs
or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
299
MKS (), enUSA
Audio System
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode (system
default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 files
may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) and all folders containing MP3
files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to
F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is
important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While various
files may be present, (files with extensions
other than mp3), only files with the .mp3
extension are played; other files are ignored
by the system. This enables you to use the
same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your
work computer, home computer and your
in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system
only plays the .mp3 files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: The MyLincoln Touch system controls
most of the audio features. See
Entertainment (page 325).
300
MKS (), enUSA
Audio System
E146318
CD slot: Insert a CD.A
Eject: Eject a CD.B
TUNE +/-: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of the TUNE buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds
in that direction. In SIRIUS mode, select the previous or next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), use
the TUNE buttons find to the previous or next channel in the selected category.
C
Volume:: Tap either side of the slider, or slide your finger across the control to increase or decrease the volume level on the system.
To slowly increase or decrease the volume level, press and hold either end of the slider.
D
301
MKS (), enUSA
Audio System
Power: Switch the audio system on and off by pressing the button.E
Seek/Fast Forward/Reverse: Press to go to the previous or next track or available radio station. Press and hold to either reverse
or fast forward through the current track or to quickly reverse or advance through the radio band in individual increments.
F
MEDIA HUB
The media hub is located in the center
console and has the following features:
C
B
A
E142605
A/V inputsA
SD card slotB
USB portsC
See Entertainment (page 325).
302
MKS (), enUSA
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: You can also set up the certain
convenience features using MyLincoln Mobile
over the internet or smartphone application.
For more information on MyLincoln Mobile,
and to set up your MyLincoln Mobile account,
visit:
Web Address
http://support.lincoln.com/owner-services/
mylincoln-mobile-app.
A
B
G
C
DF
E
E161891
303
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Phone.A
Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation).B
Climate.C
Settings.D
Home.E
Information.F
Entertainment.G
This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cellular
phone, multimedia, climate control and
navigation system. The corners display any
active modes within those menus, such as
phone status or the climate temperature.
Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature
that allows you to access and control audio
features for 30 minutes after you switch the
ignition off (and no doors open).
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
• Phone.
• Quick Dial.
• Phonebook.
• History.
• Messaging.
• Settings.
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
• My Home.
• Favorites.
• Previous Destinations.
• Point of Interest.
• Emergency.
• Street Address.
• Intersection.
• City Center.
• Map.
• Edit Route.
• Cancel Route.
CLIMATE
Press to select any of the following:
• Driver Settings.
• Recirculated Air.
• Auto.
• Dual.
• Passenger Settings.
• A/C.
• Defrost.
304
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
E142607
SETTINGS
Press to select any of the following:
• Clock.
• Display.
• Sound.
• Vehicle.
• Settings.
• Help.
E142613
HOME
Press to access your home screen.
Depending on your vehicle’ s option
package and software, your screens may vary
in appearance from the descriptions in this
section. Your features may also be limited
depending on your market. Check with an
authorized dealer for availability.
E142608
INFORMATION
Press to select any of the following:
• Services.
• Travel Link.
• Alerts.
• Calendar.
• Apps.
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
• AM.
• FM.
• SIRIUS.
• CD.
• USB.
• BT Stereo.
• SD Card.
• A/V In.
Using the Touch-Sensitive Controls
on Your System
To switch a feature on and off, just touch the
graphic with your finger. To get the best
performance from the touch-sensitive
controls:
• Do not press hard on the controls. They
are sensitive to light touch.
• Use your bare finger to touch the center
of a touch-control graphic. Touching
off-center of the graphic may affect
operation of a nearby control.
• Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
• Since the touchscreen operates based
on the touch of a finger, you may have
trouble using it if you are wearing gloves.
• Keep metal and other conductive
material away from the surface of the
touchscreen as this may cause electronic
interference (for example, inadvertently
switching on a feature other than the one
you meant to switch on).
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your bezel:
• Power: Switch the media or climate
features off and on.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing
media.
• Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you
normally would in media modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the entertainment
system.
• Climate Control: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of the
climate control system.
Using Your Steering Wheel Controls
You can use your steering wheel controls to
interact with the touchscreen system.
305
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
• VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
• Seek:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets or press
and hold to seek between stations.
• While in USB or CD mode, press to
seek between stations or press and
hold to fast seek.
• Voice: Press to start a voice session.
Press again and hold to end a voice
session.
• Phone: Press to answer a call or to
switch between calls. Press and hold to
end a call or to reject an incoming call.
See Steering Wheel (page 65).
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used for
cleaning glasses. If dirt or fingerprints are still
visible, apply a small amount of alcohol to
the cloth. Do not pour or spray alcohol onto
the display. Do not use detergent or any type
of solvent to clean the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help
you with any questions you are not able to
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Contact an authorized dealer.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split or
damaged. Place cords and cables out of
the way, so they do not interfere with the
operation of pedals, seats, compartments
or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
• For your safety, some SYNC functions are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds
under 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
306
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information, such
as Point of Interest reviews and ratings,
SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores, movie
times or ski conditions.
• Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering a
navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts or
recent phone call entries).
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phoneCellular Phone
Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook contacts (from a USB)
List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent phone call entries
Editing the keypad codeSystem Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active
Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless
Editing the list of wireless networks
Playing a videoVideos, Photos and Graphics
Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wallpaper
Composing text messagesText Messages
307
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Restricted features
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC,
the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text
messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell phone
was not connected to the system. In addition,
if you connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
media content. The system also records a
short development log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
system uses a log profile and other data to
improve the system and help diagnose any
problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and
development log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or your
vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master
Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor Company
and Ford of Canada do not access the system
data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third parties
acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic, Directions
and Information.
308
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Accessing and Adjusting Modes through Your Vehicle Information Display
E173235
The display is located on the right side of your
instrument cluster. It allows you to view and
make minor adjustments to active modes
without taking your hands off the wheel. For
example:
• In Entertainment mode, you can view
what is now playing, change the audio
source (such as AM, FM and CD) and
scroll through memory presets.
• In Phone mode, you can accept or reject
an incoming call, or make a call by
choosing from select menus within the
Phone menu.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, you can view the current route
or cancel a route.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, Compass appears in the display
instead of Navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the Compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle is
traveling, not true direction (for example, if the
vehicle is traveling west, the middle of the
compass graphic displays west; north displays
to the left of west though its true direction is
to the right of west).
Audio Sources and Memory Presets
E173236
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll through
the available modes.
309
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode.
• Press the left or right arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
Using Voice Recognition
This system helps you control many features
using voice commands. This allows you to
keep your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the lower left status bar
indicating the status of the voice session
(such as Listening, Success, Failed, Paused
or Try Again).
How to Use Voice Commands with Your
System
E142599
Press the voice icon. After the tone,
speak your command clearly.
You can saythese commands at any time
during a voice session
"Cancel"
"Exit"
"Go back"
"List of commands"
"Main menu"
"Next page"
"Previous page"
"What can I say?"
"Help"
What Can I Say?
To access the available voice commands for
the current session, do one of the following:
• During a voice session, press the help icon
(?) in the lower left status bar of the
screen.
• Say, "What can I say?" for an on-screen
listing of the possible voice commands
associated with your current voice
session.
• Press the voice icon. After the tone, say,
"Help" for an audible list of possible voice
commands.
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until
after the tone sounds and Listening
appears before saying a command. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
310
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the system
while it is speaking by pressing the voice
icon.
Accessing a List of Available Commands
• If you use the touchscreen, press the
Settings icon > Help > Voice Command
List.
• If you use the steering wheel control,
press the voice icon. After the tone, speak
your command clearly.
Available voice commands
"Audio list of commands"
"Bluetooth audio list of commands"
"Browse list of commands"
"CD list of commands"
"Climate control list of commands"
"List of commands"
"Navigation list of commands"
*
"Phone list of commands"
Available voice commands
"Radio list of commands"
"SD card list of commands"
"Sirius satellite list of commands"
**
"Travel link list of commands"
*
"USB list of commands"
"Voice instructions list of commands"
"Voice settings list of commands"
"Help"
*
This command is only available when your
vehicle is equipped with the navigation
system, and the navigation system SD card
is in the card slot.
**
This command is only available when you
have an active SIRIUS satellite radio
subscription.
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the
level of system interaction, help and
feedback. The system defaults to standard
interaction that uses candidate lists and
confirmation prompts as these provide the
highest level of guidance and feedback.
• Interaction Mode: Novice mode
provides detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode has
less audible interaction and more tone
prompts.
• Confirmation Prompts: The system
uses these short questions to confirm
your voice request. If switched off, the
system simply makes a best guess as to
what you requested. The system may still
occasionally ask you to confirm settings.
• Phone and Media Candidate Lists:
Candidate lists are lists of possible results
from your voice commands. The system
creates these lists when it has the same
confidence level of several options based
on your voice command.
To access these settings using the
touchscreen:
1. Press the Settings icon > Settings > then
Voice Control.
2. Select from the following:
311
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
• Interaction Mode
• Confirmation Prompts
• Media Candidate Lists
• Phone Candidate Lists
• Voice Control Volume.
To access these settings using voice
commands:
1. Press the voice icon. Wait for the prompt
"Please say a command". Another tone
sounds to let you know the system is
listening.
2. Say any of the following commands:
Voice settings using voice commands
"Confirmation prompts off"
"Confirmation prompts on"
"Interaction mode advanced"
"Interaction mode novice"
"Media candidate lists off"
"Media candidate lists on"
Voice settings using voice commands
"Phone candidate lists off"
"Phone candidate lists on"
"Help"
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode feature
which allows you to switch between using
voice commands and making on-screen
selections. This is available only when the
system displays a list of candidates
generated during a voice session. For
example, when entering in a street address
or trying to call a contact from the phone you
paired to the system.
Privacy Notice for GPS Mapping with
MyLincoln Mobile in the United
States and Canada
MyLincoln Mobile allows for GPS mapping
when a vehicle is registered to a MyLincoln
Mobile account. To remove the vehicle from
the account, thereby removing GPS mapping
ability, preform a Master Reset in the vehicle.
See Settings (page 313).
Prior to transferring ownership of a vehicle,
owners may choose to execute a Master
Reset or Factory Reset (completed via the
MyLincoln Mobile website). Either method
removes the vehicle from all MyLincoln
Mobile accounts.
we recommend that new owners conduct a
Master Reset upon taking possession of the
vehicle to remove it from any existing
MyLincoln Mobile accounts. The new owner
can activate a MyLincoln Mobile account by
completing the registration process at:
Web Address
http://support.lincoln.com/owner-services/
mylincoln-mobile-app.
312
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
SETTINGS
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
Clock.A
Display.B
Sound.C
Vehicle.D
Settings.E
Help.F
313
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
E142607
Under this menu, you can set your
clock, access and adjust the
display, sound and vehicle settings
as well as access settings for specific modes
or the help feature.
Clock
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your
vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected,
your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to
update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires
the signal, it may take a few minutes for the
update to display the correct time.
E142607
1. Press the Settings icon > Clock.
2. Press + and - to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make other
adjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hour
mode, activate GPS time synchronization
and have the system automatically update
new time zones.
You can also switch the outside air
temperature display off and on. It appears at
the top center of the touchscreen, next to the
time and date.
The system automatically saves any updates
you make to the settings.
Display
You can adjust the touchscreen display
through the touchscreen or by pressing the
voice button on your steering wheel controls
and when prompted, say, "Display settings".
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Display,
to access and make adjustments
using the touchscreen.
• Brightness allows you to make the
screen display brighter or dimmer.
• Auto DIM, when set to On, lets you use
the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature.
When set to Off, screen brightness does
not change.
• Mode allows you to set the screen to a
certain brightness or have the system
automatically change based on the
outside light level, or switch the display
off.
• If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you
have the options of switching the
display's Auto Dim feature on or off
and changing the Auto Dim Manual
Offset feature.
• Auto Dim Manual Offset allows you to
adjust screen dimming as the outside
lighting conditions change from day to
night. This feature also allows you to
adjust screen brightness using the
instrument panel dimming control.
• Edit Wallpaper
• You can have your touchscreen
display the default photo or upload
your own.
Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen
Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
either from your USB mass storage device or
from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not be
compatible and appear as a blank (black)
image on the display.
Your system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.
E142607
To access, press the Settings icon
> Display > Edit Wallpaper, and
then follow the system prompts to
upload your photographs.
314
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Only photographs that meet the following
conditions display:
• Compatible file formats are as follows:
jpg, gif, png, bmp
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.
Sound
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Sound,
then select from the following:
Sound
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
*
THX Deep Note Demo
*
Sound
Occupancy Mode
*
Speed Compensated Volume
*
Your vehicle may not have these sound
settings.
Vehicle
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle,
then select from the following:
• Ambient Lighting.
• Vehicle Health Report.
• Camera Settings.
• Enable Valet Mode.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When you switch this feature on, ambient
lighting illuminates footwells and cupholders
with a choice of colors. To access and make
adjustments:
E142607
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Ambient Lighting.
2. Touch the desired color.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease
the intensity.
To switch the feature on or off, press the
power button.
Vehicle Health Report
Switch Automatic Reminders on and off
and set the mileage interval at which you
would like to receive the reports. Press ? for
more information on these selections.
When done making your selections, press
Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you
want your report.
You can find more information on Vehicle
Health Report in this chapter. See
Information (page 351).
Camera Settings
This menu allows you to access settings for
your camera settings.
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle
> Camera Settings, then select
from the following settings:
• Enhanced Park Aids.
• Rear Camera Delay.
315
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
You can find more information on the rear
view camera in another chapter. See Rear
View Camera (page 160).
Enable Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the system
is unlocked with the correct PIN. You can
create your own four-digit PIN to lock and
unlock the system.
E142607
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Enable Valet Mode.
2. Enter a four-digit PIN twice, as prompted.
After you press Continue, the system locks
until you enter the PIN again.
Note: If the system locks, and you need to
reset the PIN, enter 3681 and the system
unlocks.
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
System
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Settings
> System, then select from the
following:
System
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French.Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen.Touch Screen Button Beep
Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices made through the climate or audio system.Touch Panel Button Beep
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC format.Keyboard Layout
Install any downloaded applications or view the current software licenses.Install Applications
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal data.Master Reset
316
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Voice Control
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Voice Control, then select from
the following:
Voice control
Standard interaction mode provides more detailed interaction and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible
interaction and more tone prompts.
Interaction Mode
Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly heard or understood your request.
*
Confirmation Prompts
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these switched off.
Media Candidate Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these switched off.
Phone Candidate Lists
This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.Voice Control Volume
*
Even with confirmation prompts switched off, the system may occasionally ask you to confirm settings.
Media Player
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Media Player, then select from
the following:
317
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Media player
When this feature is on, the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial connection. This
allows you to listen to music during the indexing process. When this feature is off, the system does not automat-
ically switch to the inserted media source.
Autoplay
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You can also set a device as your favorite so that the
system automatically attempts to connect to that device at every ignition cycle.
Bluetooth Devices
When this feature is on, the system automatically indexes media on your connected Bluetooth device.Index Bluetooth Audio
Devices
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote Database Info
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies metadata information for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Gracenote Management
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies cover art for your music files. This overrides any art from
your device. This feature defaults to Media Player.
Cover Art Priority
Navigation
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Navigation, then select from the
following:
318
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation
Switch breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top.
Switch the Parking POI notification on and off.
Choose to have the system display the Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route first. If you set Always Use
Preferred Route to Yes, the system uses the selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired
destination. Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route selection in destination programming. The system
only calculates one route based on the preferred route setting. Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low,
medium or high cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
Route Preferences
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid tollroads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.
Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences
Have the system automatically fill in State/Province information.
Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs.Traffic Preferences
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the road may occur.
319
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announcements.
Have the system avoid traffic problems automatically.
Switch traffic alert notifications on and off.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on planned navigation routes.Avoid Areas
Phone
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Phone, then select from the
following:
320
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Phone
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save it as a favorite.Bluetooth Devices
Switch Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside your vehicle. With this feature switched on, text
message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle.
Do Not Disturb
Switch on or switch off the 911 Assist feature. See Information (page 351).911 Assist
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.Phone Ringer
Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.Text Message Notification
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet data connection. Select to make your connection
profile with the personal area network or to switch off your connection. You can also choose to adjust your
settings or have the system always connect, never connect when roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more
information.
Internet Data Connection
Access features, such as automatic phonebook download, re-download your phonebook, add contacts from
your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning
321
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that creates
a wireless network within your vehicle,
thereby allowing other devices (such as
personal computers or phones) in your
vehicle to speak to each other, share files or
play games. Using this Wi-Fi feature,
everyone in your vehicle can also gain access
the internet if you have a USB mobile
broadband connection inside your vehicle,
your phone supports personal area
networking and if you park outside a wireless
hotspot.
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Wireless & Internet, then select
from the following:
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure you switch it on for
connectivity purposes.
Wi-Fi Settings
Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You can categorize by
alphabetical listing, priority and signal strength. You can also choose to search for a network, connect to a
network, disconnect from a network, receive more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when switched on.
This forms the local area network within your vehicle for things such as, game playing, file transfer and internet
browsing. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as the internet
gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
322
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Wi-Fi
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile broadband connection to access the internet.
(You must switch on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer before connecting it to the
system.) This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile broadband connection.
(USB mobile broadband settings may not display if the device is already on.) You can select the following:
Country, Carrier, Phone Number, User Name and Password.
USB Mobile Broadband
Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to connect,
disconnect, set as favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Bluetooth Settings
Choose your connection methods and change them as needed. You can select to Change Order and have the
system either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.
Prioritize Connection
Methods
E142626
The Wi-Fi
CERTIFIED
Logo is a
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Help,
then select from the following:
323
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Help
View your vehicle's current location if your vehicle is equipped with navigation. If your vehicle is not equipped
with navigation, you do not see this button.
Where Am I?
Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Information
Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Sirius satellite radio ESN
Gracenote Database Information and Library version
View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your system.Software Licenses
Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving.Driving Restrictions
Switch on and switch off the 911 Assist feature. See Information (page 351).911 Assist
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick
access if there is an emergency. Select Edit to access your phonebook and then select the desired contacts.
The numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts you select
appear at the end of the 911 Assist call process.
View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice Command List
324
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
To access Help using the voice commands,
press the voice button, then, after the tone,
say "Help". The system provides allowable
voice commands for the current mode.
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
E161892
AM 1 and AM ASTA
FM 1, FM 2 and FM ASTB
SIRIUSC
CDD
325
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
USBE
Touch this button to scroll down for more options, such as SD Card, BT Stereo and A/V InF
These buttons change with the media mode you are in.G
Radio memory presets and CD controls.H
Note: Some features may not be available in
your area. Contact an authorized dealer for
more information.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Browsing Device Content
When listening to audio on a device, you can
browse through other devices without having
to change sources. For example, if you are
currently listening to audio on an SD card,
you can browse all the artists that are stored
on your USB device.
E142599
Press the voice icon on the steering
wheel. When prompted, you can
say:
"BROWSE" within devices
"Browse"
*
"Browse <league> games"
**
"Browse <Sirius category> channels"
**
"Browse SD card"
"Browse Sirius channel guide"
**
"Browse USB"
"Help"
*
If you only say, "Browse", you can then say
any commands in the following chart.
**
This command is only usable if you have an
active subscription to Sirius satellite radio.
"BROWSE"
"<League> Games"
*
"<Sirius category> channels"
*
"SD card"
**
"Sirius Channel Guide"
*
"USB"
**
"Help"
*
This command is only usable if you have an
active subscription to Sirius satellite radio.
**
For more commands in SD card or USB
mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port"
section of this chapter.
326
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice command.
For example, if you are listening to music on
a USB device, then want to switch to a
satellite radio channel, simply press the voice
button on the steering wheel controls and
say the name of the Sirius station (such as,
"the Highway"). The following voice
commands are available at the top level of
the voice session no matter which current
audio source you are listening to (such as a
USB device or Sirius satellite radio).
Note: This is only available when your
MyLincoln Touch system language is set to
North American English.
Sample commands
"<87.9-107.9>"
"<530-1710>"
"<Channel name>"
*
"AM <530-1710>"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"Play [album] <name>"
**
"Play [artist] <name>"
**
Sample commands
"Play [genre] <name>"
**
"Play [playlist] <name>"
**
"Play [song] <name>"
**
"Play <name>"
"Play <name (song or album)> by <artist
name>"
"Sirius <0-223>"
*
"Sports games"
*
*
This command is only usable if you have an
active subscription to Sirius satellite radio.
**
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional. For
example, if you say, "Play Metallica", this is
the same as the voice command, "Play
[artist] <name>".
AM/FM Radio
E142611
Touch the AM or FM tab to listen
to the radio.
To change between AM and FM presets, just
touch the AM or FM tab.
Memory Presets
Save a station by pressing and holding one
of the memory preset areas. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when finished.
HD Radio
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The
light on the button illuminates when the
feature is on. HD Radio allows you to receive
radio broadcasts digitally, where available,
providing free, crystal-clear sound. See HD
Radio information later in this chapter.
Scan
Touch this button to go to the next strong
AM or FM radio station. The light on the
button illuminates when the feature is on.
Options
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
327
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
• Balance and Fade
• THX Deep Note Demo
• DSP (Digital Signal processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Set PTY for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of music
you would like to search for. You can then
choose to either seek or scan for the stations
playing that category.
RDS Text Display
This allows you to view the information
broadcast by FM stations.
AST
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the
system automatically store the six strongest
stations in your current location.
TAG Button
This feature is available when HD Radio is
on, and allows you to tag a song to download
later. When you select On, TAG appears
on-screen when HD Radio is active. You can
touch TAG to save the information of the
song that is playing. When you plug in your
portable music player, the information
transfers, if supported by your device. When
you are connected to iTunes®, the tags
appear to remind you of the songs you would
like to download. See HD Radio information
later in this chapter.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to enter the desired station
number manually. Touch Enter when you
are done.
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available
in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a
special receiver that allows it to receive
digital broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide
to available stations and programming,
please visit www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD Radio logo either blinks when
acquiring a digital station, and then stays
solid when digital audio is playing, or is grey
when acquiring a digital station, and then
changes to orange when digital audio is
playing. When this logo is available, you may
also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
328
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode
(only) if the current station is broadcasting
multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers signify available digital channels
where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2
through HD7) are only available digitally.
TAG allows you to save a song to download
later when you are on an acquired HD Radio
station and the feature is on. To turn the
feature on and use it:
1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG
Button > On.
2. When you hear a song you like, touch
TAG.
3. The system automatically saves the
song's information and transfers it to your
portable music player (if supported)
when you connect it to the system. The
system automatically transfers the tag
to your player (if already connected) and
a pop-up confirms the transfer.
4. When you access iTunes with your
portable music player, the tags appear
to you as a reminder. The system allows
you to tag up to approximately 100 songs.
For a list of devices that support tagging,
see www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling
of all available stations. This feature still
works when HD Radio reception is on,
although it does not scan for HD2-HD7
channels. You may see the HD logo
appear if the station has a digital
broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to
reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your vehicle
is outside the station’s reception area.
329
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute
due to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is
available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station
mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in
the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog
to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
330
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.This is poor time alignment by the radio
broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in audio volume.
No action required. The reception issue may
clear up as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between analog and
digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in and out.
No action required. This is normal behavior.
Wait until the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not available until the
HD Radio broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune.
No action required. The station is not available
in your current location.
The previously stored multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your current reception
area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.Text information does not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.There is no text information shown for
currently selected frequency.
No action required. This is normal behavior.Pressing Scan disables HD2-HD7 channel
search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found when Scan is
pressed.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
331
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company
and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed, added
or deleted at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the
voice button and, after the tone, say "Radio",
then any of the following commands.
"RADIO"
"<87.9-107.9>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD"
1
"<530-1710>"
"AM"
"RADIO"
"AM <530-1710>"
"AM autoset"
"AM autoset preset <#>"
"AM preset <#>"
"Browse"
2
"FM"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
1
"FM autoset"
"FM autoset preset <#>"
"FM preset <#>"
"FM 1"
"FM 1 preset <#>"
"FM 2"
"FM 2 preset <#>"
"HD <#>"
1
"Preset <#>"
"RADIO"
"Radio off"
"Radio on"
"Set PTY"
"Tune"
3
"Help"
1
If available.
2
If you have said "Browse", see the "Browse"
chart later in this section.
3
If you have said "Tune", see the following
"Tune" chart.
"TUNE"
"<530-1710>"
"<87.9-107.9>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
*
"AM"
"AM <530-1710>"
"AM autoset"
332
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
"TUNE"
"AM autoset preset <#>"
"AM preset <#>"
"FM"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
*
"FM autoset"
"FM autoset preset <#>"
"FM preset <#>"
"FM 1"
"FM 1 preset <#>"
"FM 2"
"FM 2 preset <#>"
"HD <#>"
*
"Preset <#>"
"Help"
*
If available.
Sirius® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
E142611
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select the
SIRIUS tab.
Memory Presets
Save a channel by pressing and holding one
of the memory preset areas. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the channel.
Sound returns when finished.
ALERT
Save the current song, artist, or team as a
favorite. The system alerts you when it plays
again on any channel.
Replay
Replay audio on the current channel. You can
replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as
long as you have remained tuned to the
current station. Changing stations erases the
previous audio.
While in replay mode:
• Press and release the seek buttons to
hear the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the seek buttons to
reverse or fast forward in the current
track.
• Press play or pause to play or pause the
audio.
• Press Replay to return to live audio if you
have been using the feature to replay
audio.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of
channels.
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust various
media settings.
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• THX Deep Note Demo
• DSP (Digital Signal processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
333
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Set Category for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of music
you would like to search for. You can then
choose to either seek or scan for the stations
playing that category.
Parental Lockout
This allows you to lock and unlock channels,
change or reset your PIN or unlock all
channels. To use this feature, you need your
initial PIN, which is 1234.
Artist/Title/Team Alerts
This feature allows you to select Artists,
Titles and Teams that you would like the
system to alert you to when they are playing
on other channels. Press Edit Alerts to delete
or turn off alerts. You can also set all alerts
to on or off. When an alert appears on the
screen, you can choose to Tune to the
channel, to Cancel the alert or to Disable
Alerts. If you are listening to a sporting event,
you can save your favorite teams so that the
system can alert you when they are playing
on a satellite radio channel.
Note: Sirius does not support the Alert feature
on all channels. Ford Motor Company shall not
be responsible for Alert feature variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
Sirius requires this number when
communicating with you about your account.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to enter the desired
satellite channel number manually. Touch
Enter when you are done.
Browse
Touch this button to view a list of all available
stations. Scroll to see more categories. Touch
the station you want to listen to.
Touch Skip if you want to skip this channel.
Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to
listen to this channel.
Touch Title or Artist to see song and artists
on other stations.
Sirius Satellite Radio Information
Note: Sirius reserves the unrestricted right to
change, rearrange, add or delete programming
including canceling, moving or adding
particular channels, and its prices, at any time,
with or without notice to you. Ford Motor
Company shall not be responsible for any such
programming changes.
E142593
Sirius satellite radio is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts a
variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming. Your
factory-installed Sirius satellite radio system
includes hardware and a limited subscription
term that begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a list of Sirius
satellite radio channels, and other features,
please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United
States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call Sirius
at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is published
under the eCos License.
334
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. The ESN
is on the System Information Screen (SR
ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your ESN,
touch the bottom left corner of the
touchscreen. Touch SIRIUS > Options.
Sirius Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and
other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
335
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseRadio display
No action required. This message should
disappear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to
produce audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring...
If this message does not clear shortly, or with
an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a
fault. See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Sat Fault/Sirius System Failure.
Tune to another channel or choose another
preset.
The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel.
Contact Sirius at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe
to the channel, or tune to another channel.
Your subscription does not include this
channel.
Unsubscribed Channel.
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the Sirius satellite or
Sirius tower to your vehicle antenna.
No Signal.
No action required. The process may take up
to three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating.
Contact Sirius at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Call Sirius
1-888-539-7474.
Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or
Skip function on that station.
All the channels in the selected category are
either skipped or locked.
None found. Check Channel Guide.
No action required.Sirius has updated the channels available for
your vehicle.
Subscription Updated.
336
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to Sirius satellite
radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands.
If you are not listening to Sirius satellite radio,
press the voice button and, after the tone,
say "Sirius", then any of the following
commands.
"SIRIUS"
"<Channel name>"
"Preset <#>"
"SAT"
"SAT preset <#>"
"SAT 1"
"SAT 1 Preset <#>"
"SAT 2"
"SAT 2 preset <#>"
"SAT 3"
"SAT 3 preset <#>"
"SIRIUS"
"Sirius <0-223>"
"Sirius off"
"Sirius on"
"Sports game"
*
"Tune"
**
"Help"
*
If you have said "Sports game", see the
following "Sports game" chart.
**
If you have said "Tune", see the following
"Tune" chart.
"SPORTS GAME"
"Tune to the <college name> game"
"Tune to the <team city> game"
"Tune to the <team city> <team name>
game"
"Tune to the <team name> game"
"Help"
"TUNE"
"<Channel Name>"
"Preset <#>"
"SAT"
"SAT 1"
"SAT 1 preset <#>"
"SAT 2"
"SAT 2 preset <#>"
"SAT 3"
"SAT 3 preset <#>"
"Sirius <0-223>"
"Help"
CD
E142611
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select the
CD tab.
You can also advance and reverse the current
track or current folder, if applicable.
337
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Repeat
Touch this button to repeat the currently
playing track, all tracks on the disc or turn the
feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Touch this button to play the tracks or entire
albums in random order, or turn the feature
off if already on.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of
all available tracks.
More Info
Touch this button to see disc information.
Options
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• THX Deep Note Demo
• DSP (Digital Signal processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Compression
Touch this button to turn the compression
feature off and on.
Browse
Touch this button to look through all
available CD tracks.
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say "CD", then any
of the following commands.
"CD"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play next track"
"CD"
"Play previous track"
"Play track <1-512>"
"Repeat"
"Repeat folder"
*
"Repeat off"
"Repeat track"
"Shuffle"
"Shuffle CD"
*
"Shuffle folder"
*
"Shuffle off"
"Help"
*
This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.
SD Card Slot and USB Port
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, press the card in and the
system ejects it. Do not attempt to pull the
card to remove it as this could cause damage.
338
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 364).
E142619
The SD card slot is located either in the
center console or behind a small access door
in the instrument panel. To access and play
music from your device, press the lower left
corner of the touchscreen.
E142620
SD
logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
USB Port
E142621
The USB ports are located either in the center
console or behind a small access door in the
instrument panel. To access and play music
from your device, press the lower left corner
of the touchscreen.
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
In order to playback video from your iPod or
iPhone, you must have a special combination
USB/RCA composite video cable (which you
can buy from Apple). When you connect the
cable to your iPod or iPhone, plug the other
end into both the RCA jacks and the USB
port.
Playing Music from Your Device
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 30,000 songs.
E142611
Insert your device and select the
SD Card or USB tab once the
system recognizes it. You can then
select from the following options:
Repeat
This feature replays the currently playing
song or album.
Shuffle
Touch this button to play music on the
selected album or folder in random order.
Similar Music
This feature allows you to choose music
similar to what is currently playing.
More Info
Touch this button to see disc information
such as current track, artist name, album and
genre.
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust various
media settings.
339
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Sound Settings allows you to adjust
settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• THX Deep Note Demo
• DSP (Digital Signal processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Media Player Settings allows you to select
more settings, which is under Media Player.
See Settings (page 313).
Device Information displays software and
firmware information about the currently
connected media device.
Update Media Index indexes your device
when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (such as
adding or removing tracks) to make sure you
have the latest voice commands available
for all media on the device.
Browse
This feature allows you to view the contents
of the device. It also allows you to search by
categories, such as genre, artist or album.
If you want to view song information such as
Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and Genre,
touch the on-screen album art.
You can also touch What’s Playing to hear
how the system pronounces the current band
and song. This can be helpful when using
voice commands to make sure the system
correctly plays your request.
Playing Video from Your Device
To access and play video from your device,
your vehicle's transmission must be in
position P with the ignition in accessory
mode. See Starting and Stopping the
Engine (page 126).
SD Card and USB Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a USB device
or an SD card, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. When prompted, say any of the
following commands.
If you are not listening to a USB device or an
SD card, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say "USB" or "SD card", then any of the
following commands.
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Browse"
*
"Next"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play album <name>"
"Play all"
"Play artist <name>"
"Play audiobook <name>"
"Play author <name>"
"Play composer <name>"
"Play folder <name>"
"Play genre <name>"
"Play movie <name>"
**
340
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Play music video <name>"
**
"Play playlist <name>"
"Play podcast <name>"
"Play podcast episode <name>"
"Play similar music"
"Play song <name>"
"Play TV show <name>"
**
"Play TV show episode <name>"
**
"Play video <name>"
**
"Play video podcast <name>"
**
"Play video podcast episode <name>"
**
"Play video playlist <name>"
**
"Previous"
"Repeat all"
"Repeat off"
"Repeat one"
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Shuffle"
"Shuffle album"
"Shuffle off"
"What's this?"
"Help"
*
If you have said you would like to browse
your USB or SD card, the system prompts
you to specify what you would like to browse.
When prompted, see the following "Browse"
chart.
**
These commands are only available in USB
mode and are device-dependent.
"BROWSE"
"Album <name>"
"All albums"
"All artists"
"All audiobooks"
"All authors"
"All composers"
"BROWSE"
"All folders"
"All genres"
"All movies"
*
"All music videos"
*
"All playlists"
"All podcasts"
"All songs"
"All TV shows"
*
"All video playlists"
*
"All video podcasts"
*
"All videos"
*
"Artist <name>"
"Audiobook <name>"
"Author <name>"
"Composer <name>"
"Folder <name>"
341
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
"BROWSE"
"Genre <name>"
"Playlist <name>"
"Podcast <name>"
"TV show <name>"
*
"Video <name>"
*
"Video playlist <name>"
*
"Video podcast <name>"
*
"Help"
*
This command is only available in USB
mode and is device-dependent.
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital
media player, including iPod, Zune™, plays
from device players, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA,
WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed media
from your playing device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the media
files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty metadata
tags as Unknown.
In order to playback video from your iPod or
iPhone, you must have a special combination
USB/RCA composite video cable (which you
can buy from Apple). When you connect the
cable to your iPod or iPhone, plug the other
end into both the RCA jacks and the USB
port.
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio over
your vehicle's speakers from your connected,
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
E142611
To access, press the lower left
corner on the touchscreen, then
select the BT Stereo tab.
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a Bluetooth
audio device, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
control. When prompted, say "Next song",
"Pause", "Play" or "Previous song".
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio
device, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say "Next song", "Pause", "Play" or
"Previous song".
A/V Inputs
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
For safety reasons, do not connect or
adjust the settings on your portable
music player while your vehicle is
moving.
342
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
WARNINGS
Store the portable music player in a
secure location, such as the center
console or the glove box, when your
vehicle is moving. Hard objects may become
projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which
may increase the risk of serious injury. The
audio extension cable must be long enough
to allow the portable music player to be
safely stored while your vehicle is moving.
E142622
Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an
auxiliary audio/video source (such as a
gaming systems or a personal camcorder)
by connecting RCA cords (not included) to
these input jacks. The jacks are yellow, red
and white and are located either behind a
small access door on the instrument panel
or in your center console.
You can also use the A/V inputs as an
auxiliary input jack to play music from your
portable music player over your vehicle's
speakers. Plug in your 1/8 inch (3.5
millimeter) RCA adapter into the two left A/V
input jacks (red and white).
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select A/V In.
To use the auxiliary input jack feature, make
sure that your portable music player is
designed for use with headphones and that
it is fully charged. You also need an audio
extension cable with stereo male 1/8-inch
(3.5 millimeter) connectors at one end and
a RCA jack at the other.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and portable
music player. Set the parking brake and
put the transmission in position P.
2. Attach one end of the audio extension
cable to the headphone output of your
player and the other end into the adapter
in one of the two left A/V input jacks
(white or red) inside the center console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select either a tuned FM
station or a CD (if there is a CD already
loaded into the system).
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn the portable music player on and
adjust the volume to ½ the maximum.
6. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab. (You
should hear audio from your portable
music player although it may be low.)
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music
player until it reaches the level of the FM
station or CD by switching back and forth
between the controls.
In order to playback video from your iPod or
iPhone, you must have a special combination
USB/RCA composite video cable (which you
can buy from Apple). When you connect the
cable to your iPod or iPhone, plug the other
end into both the RCA jacks and the USB
port.
Troubleshooting
• Do not connect the audio input jack to a
line level output. The jack only works
correctly with devices that have a
headphone output with a volume control.
• Do not set the portable music player's
volume level higher than is necessary to
match the volume of the CD or FM radio
as this causes distortion and reduces
sound quality.
343
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
• If the music sounds distorted at lower
listening levels, turn the portable music
player volume down. If the problem
persists, replace or recharge the batteries
in the portable media player.
• Control the portable media player in the
same manner when used with
headphones, as the auxiliary input jack
does not provide control (such as Play or
Pause) over the attached portable media
player.
PHONE
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
344
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
PhoneA
Quick DialB
PhonebookC
HistoryD
MessagingE
SettingsF
Hands-free calling is one of the main features
of SYNC. Once you pair your phone, you can
access many options using the touchscreen
or voice commands. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone’s
functionality.
At a minimum, most cellular phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see your
device’s manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving
The first thing you must do to use the phone
features of SYNC is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with SYNC.
This allows you to use your phone in a
hands-free manner.
345
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: Put the transmission in park (P). Switch
on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left
corner of the touchscreen. Find SYNC
appears on the screen, and instructs you
to begin the pairing process from your
device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cellular phone is in the proper
mode. See your device’s manual if
necessary.
Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN
appears on your device.
3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
it does not support Secure Simple Pairing.
To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
touchscreen. Skip the next step.
4. When prompted on your phone’ s display,
confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC
matches the PIN displayed on your
cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone
options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your device's manual
and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Put the transmission in park (P). Switch
on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
1. Press the Phone corner of the
touchscreen > Settings > BT Devices >
Add Device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cellular phone is in the proper
mode. See your device’s manual if
necessary.
Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN
appears on your device.
3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
it does not support Secure Simple Pairing.
To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
touchscreen. Skip the next step.
4. When prompted on your phone’ s display,
confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC
matches the PIN displayed on your
cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone
options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your device's manual
and visit the website.
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button on your
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say, "Call <name>" or
say "Dial", then the desired number.
E142632
To end the call or exit phone mode,
press and hold this phone button
on your steering wheel controls.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.
Accept the call by pressing Accept
on the touchscreen or by pressing
this phone button on your steering
wheel controls.
E142632
Reject the call by pressing Reject
on the touchscreen or by pressing
and holding this phone button on
your steering wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
it as a missed call.
346
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on your touchscreen
to select from the following options:
Phone
Touch this button to access the on-screen
numerical pad to enter a number and place
a call. During an active call, you can also
choose to:
• Mute the call.
• Put the call on hold.
• Turn on the privacy feature.
• Join two calls.
• End the call.
Quick Dial
Set up favorite contacts from your
phonebook or history folder.
Phonebook
Touch this button to access and call any
contacts in your previously downloaded
phone book. The system places the entries
in alphabetical categories summarized at the
top of the screen.
To switch on contact picture settings, if your
device supports this feature, press Phone >
Settings > Manage Phonebook >
Download photos from Phonebook > On.
History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled
phone to SYNC, you can access any
previously dialed, received or missed calls.
You can also choose to save these to your
Favorites or to Quick Dial.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. If
your phone does not support downloading call
history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps track of
calls made with the SYNC system.
Messaging
Send text messages using your touchscreen.
See Text messaging later in this section.
Settings
Touch this button to access various phone
settings, such as turning Bluetooth on and
off, managing your phonebook and more. See
Phone settings later in this section.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are
speed-dependent and not available when your
vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5
km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, such as
LOL.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
2. Select Messaging.
3. Choose from the following:
• Listen (speaker icon).
• Dial.
• Send Text.
• View.
• Delete.
347
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature. It is
unavailable when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
2. Touch Messaging > Send Text.
3. Enter a phone number or choose from
your phonebook.
4. You can select from the following
options:
• Send, which sends the message as it is.
• Edit Text, which allows you to customize
the pre-defined message or create a
message on your own.
You can then preview the message, verify the
recipient as well as update the message list.
Text message options
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
Text message options
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
Note: If you select View and your vehicle is
traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system
offers to read the message to you instead of
allowing you to view it while driving.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone
sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with
the caller name and ID, if supported by your
phone. You can press:
• View to view the text message.
• Listen for SYNC to read the message to
you.
• Dial to call the contact.
• Ignore to exit the screen.
Phone Settings
Press Phone > Settings.
Bluetooth Devices
Touch this tab to connect, disconnect, add
or delete a device, as well as save it as a
favorite.
Bluetooth
Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on.
Do Not Disturb
Touch this tab if you want all calls to go
directly to your voice mail and not ring in the
vehicle. When this feature is on, text message
notifications do not ring inside the cabin
either.
348
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
911 Assist
Switch on or switch off the 911 Assist feature.
See Information (page 351).
Phone Ringer
Select the ring tone you want to hear when
you receive a call. Choose from possible
system ring tones, your currently paired
phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or
a silent notification.
Text Message Notification
Select a text message notification, if
supported by your phone. Choose from
possible system alert tones, text-to-speech
or silent.
Internet Data Connection
If your phone is compatible, use this screen
to adjust your internet data connection.
Select to make your connection profile with
the personal area network or to switch off
your connection. You can also choose to
adjust your settings or have the system
always connect, never connect when roaming
or query on connect. Press ? for more
information.
Manage Phonebook
Touch this button to access features such as
automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts
from your phone as well as delete or upload
your phonebook.
Roaming Warning
Touch this button to have the system alert
you when your phone is in roaming mode.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
"PHONE"
"Call"
"Call <name>"
"Call <name> at home"
"Call <name> at work"
"Call <name> on cell"
"Call <name> on other"
"PHONE"
"Call voicemail"
"Dial"
"Do not disturb off"
"Do not disturb on"
"Forward text messages"
"Go to hands free"
*
"Hold call off"
*
"Hold on"
*
"Join calls"
*
"Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text messages"
"Messages"
**
"Mute call"
*
"Pair phone"
"Privacy on"
*
"Read text message"
349
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
"PHONE"
"Reply to text messages"
"Turn ringer off"
"Turn ringer on"
"PHONE"
"Unmute call"
*
"Help"
*
This command is only available during an
active call.
**
If you say "Messages", see the following
"Messages" chart for additional commands.
"MESSAGES"
"Call"
"Forward text messages"
"Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text messages"
"Reply to text messages"
"Help"
350
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
INFORMATION
A
B
C
D
E
E161889
SYNC ServicesA
Sirius Travel LinkB
AlertsC
CalendarD
SYNC ApplicationsE
351
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Under the Information menu, you can access
features such as:
• SYNC Services
• Sirius Travel Link
• Alerts
• Calendar
• SYNC Applications
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the Information
button to access these features. If
your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation,
press the corner of the touchscreen with the
green tab.
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United
States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level and
model year and may require a subscription.
Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn directions
available in select markets. Message and data
rates may apply. Ford Motor Company reserves
the right to change or discontinue this product
service at any time without prior notification
or incurring any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and
message rates may apply. Subscription may
be required. You must also have the active
SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone paired and connected to the system in
order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services.
See Phone (page 344).
Note: This feature does not function properly
if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your
cellular phone. Make sure your cellular phone
is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC
Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for
the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in roads,
traffic conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors
to collect your vehicle's current location, travel
direction and speed to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches you request. Further, to provide the
services you request, for continuous
improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications.
For more information, see SYNC Services
Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other information
identified in the Terms and Conditions, do not
subscribe or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to give
you personalized traffic reports, precise
turn-by-turn directions, business search,
news, sports, weather and more. For a
complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice
Commands
E142599
352
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say "Services". This
initiates an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow
the voice prompts to request the desired
service, such as "Traffic" or "Directions".
You can also say, "What are my choices?"
to receive a list of available services from
which to choose.
4. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the
Touchscreen
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the Information
button.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, press the green tab on your
touchscreen.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate
an outgoing call to SYNC Services using
your phone.
2. Once connected, follow the voice
prompts to request your desired Service,
such as "Traffic" or "Directions". You can
also say, "What are my choices?" to
receive a list of available services from
which to choose.
3. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say
"Directions" or "Business search". To find
the closest business or type of business
to your current location, just say
"Business search" and then "Search near
me". If you need further assistance in
finding a location you can say "Operator"
at any time within a Directions or Business
search to speak with a live operator. The
system may prompt you to speak with an
operator when it has difficulty matching
your voice request. The live operator can
assist you by searching for businesses by
name or by category, residential
addresses by street address or by name
or specific street intersections. Operator
Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services
subscription. For more information on
Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your
Destination. After the route download is
finished, the phone call automatically
ends.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation:
• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the
information display, in the status bar of
your touchscreen system and on the
SYNC Services screen. You also receive
driving instructions from audible prompts.
• When on an active route, you can select
Route Summary or Route Status using
the touchscreen controls or voice
commands to view the Route Summary
Turn List or the Route Status ETA. You
can also turn voice guidance on or off,
cancel the route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
if you want the route updated. Just say, "Yes"
when prompted and the system delivers a
new route to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
SYNC Services downloads your requested
destination to the navigation system. The
navigation system then calculates the route
and provides driving instructions. See
Navigation (page 364).
353
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Disconnecting from SYNC Services 1. Press and hold the hang-up phone button
on the steering wheel.
2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC Services
main menu.
SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information.
You can save address points, such as work or home. You can also save favorite information like sports teams,
such as Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn more about personalization by logging onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time (while connected to SYNC Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio
clip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle
Identification Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and
continue enjoying your personalized services.
Portable
SYNC Services Voice Commands
E142599
When a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation
systems), press the voice button
on the steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
"SERVICES"
"Cancel route"
"Navigation voice off"
"Navigation voice on"
"Next turn"
"Route status"
"Route summary"
"SERVICES"
"Services"
"Update route"
"Help"
354
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your
vehicle must be equipped with navigation and
your navigation SD card must be in the SD card
slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access
and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered by
Sirius Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible for
any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius Travel
Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link, it
can help you locate the best gas prices, find
movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view
the current weather map, get accurate ski
conditions and see scores to current sports
games.
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not equipped
with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby
Touch these buttons to identify traffic
incidents on your route, nearby your vehicle’s
current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at
stations close to your vehicle’s location or on
an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie
theaters and their show times, if available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby
weather, current weather, or the five day
forecast for the chosen area. Select Map to
see the weather map, which can show
storms, radar information, charts and winds.
Select Area to select from a listing of
weather locations.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and
schedules from a variety of sports. You can
also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes
when a game is in progress.
Ski Conditions
Touch this button to view ski conditions for
a specific area.
Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
355
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"
"5-day weather forecast"
"Fuel prices"
"Movie listings"
"Sports headlines"
*
"Sports schedules"
*
"Sports scores"
*
"Traffic"
"Weather"
"Weather map"
"Help"
*
If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports
schedules" or "Sports scores", you can then
say any of the commands in the following
chart.
Sports-related Commands
*
"Baseball"
"College basketball"
"College football"
"Golf"
"MLS"
"My teams"
"NBA"
"NFL"
"NHL"
"WNBA"
"Help"
*
If you want to hear headlines, schedules or
scores from a particular sport, or your favorite
team(s), say the sport (or team), then
"headlines", "schedules" or "scores".
Additional sports-related voice commands
"Baseball headlines"
"Baseball schedule"
"Baseball scores"
"College basketball headlines"
"College basketball schedule"
"College basketball scores"
"College football headlines"
"College football schedule"
"College football scores"
"Golf headlines"
"Golf leaderboard"
"Golf schedule"
"MLS headlines"
"MLS schedule"
"MLS scores"
"Motor sports headlines"
"Motor sports order"
356
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Additional sports-related voice commands
"Motor sports schedule"
"My team headlines"
"My teams schedule"
"My teams scores"
"NBA headlines"
"NBA schedule"
"NBA scores"
"NFL headlines"
"NFL schedule"
"NFL scores"
"NHL headlines"
"NHL schedule"
"NHL scores"
"WNBA headlines"
"WNBA schedule"
"WNBA scores"
"Help"
Alerts
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not equipped
with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Alerts, and then choose from any of
the following services:
• View the complete message
• Delete the message
• Delete All messages
This screen displays any system messages
(such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any messages
by turning the information icon yellow. After
you read or delete the messages, the icon
returns to white.
Calendar
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not equipped
with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current
calendar by day, week or month.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not dial
for help, which could delay response
time, potentially increasing the risk of serious
injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it yourself.
Dial emergency services immediately
to avoid delayed response time, which could
increase the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist
within five seconds of the crash, the system
or phone may be damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or damaged in a
crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone,
which could prevent 911 Assist from working
properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on prior to the incident.
357
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice
later in this section for important information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off, that
setting applies for all paired phones. If 911
Assist is turned off, either a voice message
plays or a display message (or icon) comes
on (or both) when your vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While
SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular
phones, some may have trouble using this
feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if
equipped]) or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 36). Important information regarding
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 207).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not equipped
with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Touch Apps > 911 Assist, then select On.
E142607
You can also access 911 Assist by:
• Pressing the Settings icon > Settings >
Phone > 911 Assist, or
• Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911
Assist.
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on prior
to the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time of
the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and
be located in the United States, Canada
or in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (which would trigger
911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to contact
emergency services if 911 Assist triggers. If a
connected phone sustains damage or loses
connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and
tries to connect to, any available previously
paired phone and tries to make the call to
911.
358
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If
you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts
to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your
screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and then
the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911 systems are
capable of receiving this information
electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware
sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system
has no power.
• The phones(s) previously paired or
connected to the system are thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may disclose
to emergency services that your vehicle has
been in a crash involving the deployment of
an airbag or activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically
or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your
vehicle location or other details about your
vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled maintenance
instructions, regularly inspect your
vehicle, and seek repair for any damage
or problem you suspect. Vehicle Health
Report supplements, but cannot replace,
normal maintenance and vehicle inspection.
Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain
systems electronically monitored by your
vehicle and will not monitor or report the
status of any other system, (such as brake
lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is
no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle
Health Report, but you must register to use
this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly
if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your
cellular phone. Before running a report, review
the Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create a
Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your account
at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your
report. You can also choose for SYNC to
remind you automatically to run reports at
specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.
359
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s
overall health in the form of a diagnostic
report card. The Vehicle Health Report
contains valuable information, such as:
• Vehicle diagnostic information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open recalls and Field Service Actions
• Items noted during vehicle inspections by
your authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
Making a Report
E142608
If you want to run a report by using
the touchscreen, touch Apps >
Vehicle Health Report.
E142599
To run a report by voice command,
press the voice button on the
steering wheel and, when
prompted, say "Vehicle health report".
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set up
your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
CLIMATE
Touch the lower right corner on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line and
option package, your climate screen may look
different from this screen.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See Settings
(page 313).
360
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
E148839
Power: Touch the button to turn the system on and off. Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering
the vehicle.
A
Passenger settings:B
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Touch the heated seat icon to turn the heated seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to turn the climate-controlled seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch DUAL to turn separate passenger side temperature controls off and on. When you turn off DUAL, the passenger side temperature
changes to match the driver side temperature.
361
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: The passenger side temperature and the DUAL indicator automatically turn on when the passenger is adjusting their temperature
control.
Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated in your vehicle.C
Note: When the system is controlling the fan speed automatically, all the fan speed indicators turn off.
Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air
currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C)
and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
D
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce
risk of fogging.
MAX A/C: Touch the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning
automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
A/C: Touch the button to turn air conditioning compressor on or off. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.
F
Note: In certain conditions, the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even after you switch off the air conditioning
with the A/C button.
AUTO: Touch the button to turn on automatic operation. Select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The system
adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in
order to maintain the desired temperature. You can also use the AUTO button to turn off dual zone operation by touching and holding
the button for more than two seconds.
G
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 107).H
Air distribution control: Touch these buttons to turn airflow from the windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off.
The system can distribute air through any combination of these vents.
I
MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Outside air flows through the windshield vents, fan automatically adjusts
to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full heat position. You can use this setting to defog or clear a thin covering
of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost.
362
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when MAX Defrost is on.
Driver settings:J
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Touch the heated seat icon to turn the heated seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to turn the climate-controlled seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch MyTemp to select your preset temperature setpoint. Touch and hold MyTemp to save a new preset temperature setpoint.
Touch the heated steering wheel icon to turn the heated steering wheel on and off (if equipped).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
wood-trimmed steering wheel, it does not heat
between the 10 o'clock and 2 o'clock positions.
Climate Control Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
Climate control commands
"Climate automatic"
"Climate my temperature"
"Climate off"
"Climate on"
Climate control commands
"Climate temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees"
"Climate temperature <60-85> degrees"
"Help"
There are additional climate control
commands but in order to access them, you
have to say "Climate" first. When the system
is ready to listen, you may say any of the
following commands:
"CLIMATE"
"A/C off"
"A/C on"
"Automatic"
"CLIMATE"
"Defrost off"
"Defrost on"
"Dual off"
"Floor on"
"Fan decrease"
"Fan increase"
"MAX A/C off"
"MAX A/C on"
"My temp"
"Off"
"On"
363
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
"CLIMATE"
"Panel floor on"
"Panel on"
"Rear defrost off"
"Rear defrost on"
"Recirc off"
"Recirc on"
"Temperature"
*
"Temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees"
"Temperature <60-85> degrees"
"Temperature decrease"
"Temperature high"
"Temperature increase"
"Temperature low"
"Windshield floor on"
"Help"
*
If you say "Temperature", you can then say
any of the commands in the following chart.
"TEMPERATURE"
"<15.5-29.5> degrees"
"<60-85> degrees"
"High"
"Low"
"Help"
NAVIGATION (If Equipped)
Note: The navigation SD card must be in the
SD card slot to operate the navigation system.
If you need a replacement SD card, see an
authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in and
release it. Do not attempt to pull the card out
to remove it; this could cause damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of two
main features, destination mode and map
mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner
of your touchscreen, then the Dest button
when it appears. See Setting a destination
later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and your
vehicle's current location, touch the green
bar in the upper right-hand corner of the
touchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map. See
Map mode later in this chapter.
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your touchscreen,
then the Dest button when it appears.
Choose any of the following:
Destination
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Intersection
City Center
Map
Edit Route Cancel Route
364
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
1. Enter the necessary information into the
highlighted text fields (in any order). For
address destination entry, the Go! button
appears once you enter all the necessary
information. Pressing the Go! button
makes the address location appear on
the map. If you choose Previous
Destination, the last 20 destinations you
have selected appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your
destination. You can also choose to set
this as a waypoint (have the system route
to this point on the way to your current
destination) or save it as a favorite. The
system considers any Avoid Areas
selections in its route calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different types
of routes, and then select Start Route.
• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
• Shortest: Uses the shortest distance
possible.
• Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient
route.
You can cancel the route or have the system
demo the route for you. Select Route Prefs
to set route preferences like avoiding
freeways, tollroads, ferries and car trains as
well as to use or not use high-occupancy
vehicle lanes. (High-occupancy vehicle lanes
are also known as carpool or diamond lanes.
People who ride in buses, vanpools or
carpools use these lanes.)
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road
and you do not press the Start Route button,
the system defaults to the Fastest Route
option and begins guidance.
During route guidance, you can press the
talking bubble icon that appears in the upper
right navigation corner (green bar) if you want
the system to repeat route guidance
information. When the system repeats the
last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction,
since it detects when the vehicle is moving.
Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Main categories
Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Main categories
Emergency
Community
Health & Medicine
Automotive
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
365
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Subcategories
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the + in front
of the listing.
The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).
cityseekr
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 912
cities (881 in the United States, 20 in Canada
and 11 in Mexico).
E142634
cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants, hotels
and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such as
address and phone number. If cityseekr lists
the point of interest, more information is
available, such as a brief description, check-in
and checkout times or restaurant hours.
Press More Information for a longer review,
a list of services and facilities, the average
room or meal price as well as the website.
This screen displays the point of interest icon
such as:
E143884
Hotel
E142636
Coffeehouse
E142637
Food & Drink
E142638
Nightlife
E142639
Attraction
E142640
This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
When you are viewing more information for
hotels, cityseekr also tells you if the hotel has
certain services and facilities using icons,
such as:
• Restaurant.
• Business center.
• Handicap facilities.
366
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
• Laundry.
• Refrigerator.
• 24 hour room service.
• Fitness center.
• Internet access.
• Pool.
• Wi-fi.
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average cost,
review, handicap access, hours of operation,
and website address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide information
such as star rating, price category, review,
check-in and checkout times, hotel service
icons and website address.
Setting Your Navigation Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into
account when planning your route.
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Settings
> Navigation.
Map Preferences
Breadcrumbs
Display your vehicle’s previously traveled
route with white dots. Switch this feature ON
or OFF.
Turn List Format
Have the system display your turn list Top to
Bottom or Bottom to Top.
Parking POI Notification
Set the automatic parking point of interest
notification. Switch this feature ON or OFF.
When parking point of interest notification is
on, the icons display on the map when you
get close to your destination. This may not
be very useful in dense areas, and may clutter
the map when other points of interest
display.
Route Preferences
Preferred Route
Choose to have the system display the
Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route
first. If you set Always Use Preferred Route
to Yes, the system uses the selected route
type to calculate only one route to the
desired destination.
Always Use Preferred Route
Bypass route selection in destination
programming. The system only calculates
one route based on preferred route setting.
Eco Time Penalty
Select a low, medium or high cost for the
calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting,
the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Avoid
These features allow you to choose to have
the system avoid freeways, toll roads, ferries
and car trains when planning your route.
Switch these features ON or OFF.
Use HOV Lanes
Have the system use high-occupancy vehicle
lanes, if available, when planning your route.
Navigation Preferences
Guidance Prompts
Have the system use Voice & Tones or Tone
Only on your programmed route.
367
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Auto - Fill State/Province
Have the system automatically fill in the
state and province based on the information
already entered into the system. Switch this
feature ON or OFF.
Traffic Preferences
Avoid Traffic Problems
Choose how you want the system to handle
traffic problems along your route.
• Automatic: Have the system reroute you
to avoid traffic incidents that develop and
impact the current route. The system
does not provide a traffic alert
notification.
• Manual: Have the system always provide
a traffic alert notification for traffic
incidents along the planned route. You
have a choice to accept or ignore the
notification before making the route
deviation.
Traffic Alert Notification
Have the system display traffic alert
notifications.
Other traffic alert features allows you to turn
on certain, or all, traffic icons on the map
such as road work, incident, accidents and
closed roads. Scroll down to view all the
different types of alerts. Switch these
features ON or OFF.
Avoid Areas
Choose areas which you want the system to
avoid when calculating a route for you.
Press Add to program an entry. Once you
make a selection, the system tries to avoid
the area(s) if possible for all routes. To delete
a selection, choose the listing on the screen.
When the screen changes to Avoid Areas
Edit, you can press Delete at the bottom
right of the screen.
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area of
the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D landmarks
(when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land elements
and detailed railway infrastructure for the
most essential cities around the globe. These
maps also contain features, such as town
blocks, building footprints and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects
that are typically recognizable and have a
certain tourist value. The 3D landmarks
appear in 3D map mode only. Coverage varies
and improves with updated map releases.
E174016
Change the appearance of the map display
by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in
the upper left corner of the screen. It toggles
between three different map modes: Heading
up, North up and 3D.
368
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
E142642
Heading up (2D map) always
shows the direction of forward travel
to be upward on the screen. This view
is available for map scales up to 2.5
miles (4 kilometers). The system remembers
this setting for larger map scales, but shows
the map in North up only. If the scale returns
below this level, the system restores Heading
up.
E142643
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be upward
on the screen.
E142644
3D map mode provides an elevated
perspective of the map. This viewing
angle can be adjusted and the map
can be rotated 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and then dragging
your finger along the shaded bar with arrows
at the bottom of the map.
View switches between full map, street list
and exit view in route guidance.
Menu displays a pop-up box that allows
direct access to navigation settings,
View/Edit Route, SIRIUS Travel Link,
Guidance Mute and Cancel Route.
E174017
Press the speaker button on the
map to mute route guidance. When
the light on the button illuminates,
the feature is on. The speaker button appears
on the map only when route guidance is
active.
E146188
Re-center the map by pressing this
icon whenever you scroll the map
away from your vehicle’s current
location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then synchronizes
with vehicle speed. The slower your vehicle
is traveling, the farther in the map zooms in;
the faster your vehicle is traveling, the farther
the map zooms out. To switch off the feature,
just press the + or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by swiping
your finger across the shaded bar with the
arrows.
The ETA box under the zoom buttons
appears when a route is active and displays
the distance and time to your destination. If
the button is pressed, a pop up appears with
the destination listed (and waypoint if
applicable) along with mileage and time to
destination. You may also select to have
either the estimated time to reach your
destination or your estimated arrival time.
Map Icons
E142646
Vehicle mark shows the current
location of your vehicle. It stays in
the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.
E142647
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the
map; the fixed icon is in the center of
the screen. The map position closest
to the cursor is in a window on the
top center part of the screen.
E142648
Address book entry default
icon(s) indicates the location on the
map of an address book entry. This
is the default symbol shown after the
entry has been stored to the Address Book
by any method other than the map. You can
select from any of the 22 icons available. You
can use each icon more than once.
369
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
E142649
Home indicates the location on the
map currently stored as the home
position. You can only save one
address from the Address Book as
your Home entry. You cannot change this
icon.
E142650
POI (Point Of Interest) icons
indicate locations of any point of
interest categories you choose to
display on the map. You can choose
to display three point of interest categories
on the map at one time.
E142651
Starting point indicates the starting
point of a planned route.
E142652
Waypoint indicates the location of
a waypoint on the map. The number
inside the circle is different for each
waypoint and represents the position
of the waypoint in the route list.
E142653
Destination symbol indicates the
ending point of a planned route.
E142654
Next maneuver point indicates the
location of the next turn on the
planned route.
E142655
No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals are
available for accurate map
positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with poor
GPS access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the
map display to access the following options:
Set as Dest
Touch this button to select a scrolled
location on the map as your destination. You
may scroll the map by pressing your index
finger on the map display. When you reach
the desired location, simply let go and then
touch Set as Dest.
Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to set the current location
as a waypoint.
Save to Favorites
Touch this button to save the current location
to your favorites.
POI Icons
Touch this button to select icons to display
on the map. You can select up to three icons
to display on the map at the same time. Turn
these ON or OFF.
Cancel Route
Touch this button to cancel the active route.
View/Edit Route
Access these features when a route is active:
• View Route
• Edit Destination/Waypoints
• Edit Turn List
• Detour
• Edit Route Preferences
• Edit Traffic Preferences
• Cancel Route.
Nokia is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to Nokia
by going to http://mapreporter.navteq.com.
Nokia evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their investigation
by e-mail.
370
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available
for purchase through your dealership, by
calling 1-866-4NAVTEQ (1-866-462-8837)
(in Mexico, call 01-800-557-5539) or going
to www.navigation.com/sync. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle
to determine if there is an update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
E142599
When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. After the tone, say
any of the following commands:
Navigation system voice commands
"Cancel next waypoint"
1
"Cancel route"
1
"Destination"
2
"Destination <nametag>"
"Destination <POI category>"
"Destination favorites"
"Destination home"
Navigation system voice commands
"Destination intersection"
"Destination nearest <POI category>"
"Destination nearest POI"
"Destination play nametags"
"Destination POI"
"Destination POI category"
"Destination previous destination"
"Destination street address"
"Detour"
1
"Navigation"
3
"Navigation voice volume decrease"
"Navigation voice volume increase"
"Repeat instruction"
1
"Show 3D"
"Show heading up"
"Show map"
"Show north up"
Navigation system voice commands
"Show route"
1
"Show turn list"
1
"Voice guidance off"
"Voice guidance on"
"Where am I?"
"Zoom in"
"Zoom out"
"Help"
1
These commands are only available when
a navigation route is active.
2
If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the following "Destination"
chart.
3
If you say "Navigation", you can then say
any command in the following "Navigation"
chart.
371
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
"DESTINATION"
"<nametag>"
"<POI category>"
"Favorites"
"Home"
"Intersection"
"Nearest <POI category>"
"Nearest POI"
"Play nametags"
"POI category"
"Previous destination"
"Street address"
"Help"
"NAVIGATION"
"Destination"
*
"Zoom city"
"Zoom country"
"NAVIGATION"
"Zoom minimum"
"Zoom maximum"
"Zoom province"
"Zoom state"
"Zoom street"
"Zoom to <distance>"
"Help"
*
If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the "Destination" chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
When you say either "Navigation destination
street address" or "Destination street
address", the system asks you to say the full
address. The system displays an example
on-screen. You can then speak the address
naturally, such as "One two three four Main
Street, Anytown".
372
MKS (), enUSA
MyLincoln Touch™
For a complete listing of the accessories that
are available for your vehicle, please contact
an authorized dealer or visit our online store
at Accessories.Lincoln.com (United States
only).
Lincoln Custom Accessories are available for
your vehicle through an authorized Lincoln
dealer. Lincoln Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly authorized
dealer-installed Lincoln Custom Accessories
found to be defective in factory-supplied
materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
vehicle through the warranty that provides
the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle limited
warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
• Moonroof deflectors.
• Side-window deflectors.
• Splash guards.
• Car cover*.
Interior style
• All-weather floor mats.
• Carpeted floor mats.
• Rear seat entertainment*.
• Sport pedals.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup (smoker's packages).
• Cargo organization and management.
Peace of mind
• Locking fuel plug for capless fuel system.
• Wheel locks.
• Remote start.
• Vehicle security.
*The accessory manufacturer designs,
develops and therefore warrants Lincoln
Licensed Accessories, and does not design
or test these accessories to Lincoln Motor
Company engineering requirements. Contact
an authorized Lincoln dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Consult an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
373
MKS (), enUSA
Accessories
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did not
design them specifically for automotive
use.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
374
MKS (), enUSA
Accessories
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)
• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY") from an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation ("MS") . Those
installed software products of MS origin,
as well as associated media, printed
materials, and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE") are
protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The MS
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights
reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("FORD
SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The FORD SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of third
party origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights
reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE
and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
hereinafter collectively and individually
will be referred to as "SOFTWARE".
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
375
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICE and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
suppliers shall be liable for any damages
arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse
engineer, decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICE, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY or
MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use the
WMDRM technology included in your
DEVICE to protect their intellectual
property, included copyrighted content.
Portions of the SOFTWARE on your
DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does not
affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected
content, you agree that Microsoft may
include a revocation list with the licenses.
Content owners may require you to
upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an
upgrade, you will not be able to access
content that requires the upgrade.
376
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree that
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may collect and
use technical information gathered in any
manner as part of product support
services related to the SOFTWARE or
related services. MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent may use this
information solely to improve their
products or to provide customized
services or technologies to you. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may disclose this
information to others, but not in a form
that personally identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based services.
You acknowledge and agree that MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may automatically
check the version of the SOFTWARE
and/or its components that you are
utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may
be automatically downloaded to your
DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components").
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make available
Supplemental Components, and no other
EULA terms are provided, then the terms of
this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity
providing the Supplemental Component(s)
shall be the licensor of the Supplemental
Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of the
SOFTWARE.
377
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent. Neither
MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their
affiliates nor their designated agent are
responsible for (i) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions particularly
as they pertain to safety and assumes
any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If
the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE
as a replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE
is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the
SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property
rights in and to the content which may be
accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is
the property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property laws
and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights
to use such content. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and service
providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use
of any on-line services which may be
accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use
relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE
contains documentation that is provided only
in electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject
to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as
well as end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
378
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for
the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its
parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or
their affiliates or subsidiaries. For product
support, please refer to FORD MOTOR
COMPANY instructions provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE. Should you
have any questions concerning this EULA, or
if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please refer
to the address provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT
CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES
SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT
IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY
DOLLARS (U.S. $250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®]
technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
This [Licensee Product] contains [Adobe®
Flash® Player] [Adobe® AIR®] software
under license from Adobe Systems
Incorporated, Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe
Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized
use of the software from this system in
violation of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to legal
action.
Read and follow instructions: Before using
your Windows Automotive- based system,
read and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user manual
("User's Guide"). Not following precautions
found in this User's Guide can lead to an
accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a ready
reference for you and other users unfamiliar
with the Windows Automotive-based system.
Please make certain that before using the
system for the first time, all persons have
access to the User's Guide and read its
instructions and safety information carefully.
WARNING
Operating certain parts of this system
while driving can distract your attention
away from the road, and possibly cause
an accident or other serious consequences.
Do not change system settings or enter data
non-verbally (using your hands) while driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or changing
some functions you might be required to
distract your attention away from the road
and remove your hands from the wheel.
379
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions within
the Windows Automotive-based system may
be accomplished using only voice
commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system
without removing your hands from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access
any function requiring a prolonged view of
the screen while you are driving. Pull over in
a safe and legal manner before attempting
to access a function of the system requiring
prolonged attention. Even occasional short
scans to the screen may be hazardous if your
attention has been diverted away from your
driving task at a critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving while
unable to hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently a
statistical process which is subject to errors.
It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system
and address any errors.
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are intended
to provide turn by turn instructions to get you
to a desired destination. Please make certain
all persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features
may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert
data while driving can seriously distract your
attention and could cause an accident or
other serious consequences. Stop the vehicle
in a safe and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation
features are provided only as an aid. Make
your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment. Any
route suggestions made by this system
should never replace any local traffic
regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by
this system may be inaccurate because of
changes in roads, traffic controls or driving
conditions. Always use good judgment and
common sense when following the
suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask local
authorities or an emergency services operator
for these locations. Not all emergency
services such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.
380
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
TeleNav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (“Agreement”) between you and
Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect to the
Telenav Software (including upgrades,
modifications, or additions thereto)
(collectively “Telenav Software”). All
references herein to “you” and “your” means
you, your employees, agents, and contractors,
and any other entity on whose behalf you
accept these terms and conditions, all of
whom shall also be bound by this Agreement.
Additionally, all of your account information,
as well as other payment and personal
information provided by you to Telenav
(directly or through the use of the Telenav
Software, is subject to Telenav’s privacy
policy located at http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and the
privacy policy at any time, with or without
notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the Telenav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the Telenav
Software: (a) observe all traffic laws and
otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own
personal judgment while driving. If you feel
that a route suggested by the Telenav
Software instructs you to perform an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe
situation, or directs you into an area that you
consider to be unsafe, do not follow such
instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or
otherwise manipulate the Telenav Software,
unless your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the Telenav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your driving
and will not prevent the operation of any
safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure to
comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the Telenav
Software, to provide Telenav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform Telenav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants to
you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as expressly
permitted below in connection with your
permanent transfer of the Telenav Software
license), without the right to sublicense, to
381
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
use the Telenav Software (in object code
form only) in order to access and use the
Telenav Software. This license shall
terminate upon any termination or expiration
of this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the Telenav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes, and
not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following: (a)
reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble,
translate, modify, alter or otherwise change
the Telenav Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code, audio
library or structure of the Telenav Software
without the prior express written consent of
Telenav; (c) remove from the Telenav
Software, or alter, any of Telenav’s or its
suppliers’ trademarks, trade names, logos,
patent or copyright notices, or other notices
or markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software to
others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e) use
the Telenav Software in any manner that (i)
infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy
or other rights of any party, (ii) violates any
law, statute, ordinance or regulation,
including but not limited to laws and
regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening,
abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory,
vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the Telenav Software without
advanced written permission of Telenav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to
applicable law, in no event will Telenav, its
licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be liable
for any decision made or action taken by you
or anyone else in reliance on the information
provided by the Telenav Software. Telenav
also does not warrant the accuracy of the
map or other data used for the Telenav
Software. Such data may not always reflect
reality due to, among other things, road
closures, construction, weather, new roads
and other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising out of
your use of the Telenav Software. For
example but without limitation, you agree
not to rely on the Telenav Software for
critical navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others is
dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as
the maps or functionality of the Telenav
Software are not intended to support such
high risk applications, especially in more
remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE
AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO
YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
382
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY
TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS
OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR
THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT
YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED
HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL
DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall be
settled by independent arbitration involving
a neutral arbitrator and administered by the
American Arbitration Association in the
County of Santa Clara, California. The
arbitrator shall apply the Commercial
Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note
that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator
shall be binding upon both parties. You
expressly agree to waive your right to a jury
trial.
This Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its conflict
of laws provisions. To the extent judicial
action is necessary in connection with the
binding arbitration, both Telenav and you
agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction
of the courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations Convention
on Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods shall not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the Telenav
Software, and expressly conditioned upon
the new user of the Telenav Software
agreeing to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale,
assignment or transfer that is not expressly
permitted under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately cease
all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav may
assign this Agreement to any other party at
any time without notice, provided the
assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
383
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and Telenav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the Telenav Software, you consent
to receive from Telenav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the Telenav Software
(collectively, “Notices”) electronically.
Telenav may provide such Notices by posting
them on Telenav’s Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your consent
to receive Notices electronically, you must
discontinue your use of the Telenav Software.
8.4
Telenav’s or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party’s right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the remaining
provisions of this Agreement will remain in
full force and effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words “include” and “including,” and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words “without
limitation”.
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and other
data licensed to Telenav by third party
vendors for the benefit of you and other end
users. This Agreement includes end-user
terms applicable to these companies
(included at the end of this Agreement), and
thus your use of the Telenav Software is also
subject to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to Telenav’ s
third party vendor licensors:
End User License Agreement For
Distribution By HERE For North
America/APAC
The content provided (“Data”) is licensed,
not sold. By opening this package, or
installing, copying, or otherwise using the
Data, you agree to be bound by the terms of
this agreement. If you do not agree to the
terms of this agreement, you are not
permitted to install, copy, use, resell or
transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the
terms of this agreement, and have not
installed, copied, or used the Data, you must
contact your retailer or HERE North America,
LLC (as defined below) within thirty (30)
days of purchase for a refund of your
purchase price. To contact HERE, please visit
www.here.com.
384
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
The Data is provided for your personal,
internal use only and may not be resold. It is
protected by copyright, and is subject to the
following terms (this “End User License
Agreement”) and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and HERE
and its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand. For purposes
of these terms, “HERE” shall mean (a) HERE
North America, LLC with respect to Data for
the Americas and/or the Asia Pacific region
and (b) HERE Europe B.V. for Data for
Europe, the Middle East and/or Africa.
The Data includes certain information and
related content provided under license to
HERE from third parties and is subject to the
applicable supplier terms and copyright
notices set forth at the following URL:
http://corporate.navteq.com/supplier_terms.html.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use:
You agree that your license to use this Data
is limited to and conditioned on use for solely
personal, noncommercial purposes, and not
for service bureau, timesharing or other
similar purposes. Except as otherwise set
forth herein, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble or reverse engineer any portion
of this Data, and may not transfer or
distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by mandatory
laws.
License Limitations on Transfer:
Your limited license does not allow transfer
or resale of the Data, except on the condition
that you may transfer the Data and all
accompanying materials on a permanent
basis if: (a) you retain no copies of the Data;
(b) the recipient agrees to the terms of this
End-User License Agreement; and (c) you
transfer the Data in the exact same form as
you purchased it by physically transferring
the original media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD
you purchased), all original packaging, all
Manuals and other documentation.
Specifically, Multi-disc sets may only be
transferred or sold as a complete set as
provided to you and not as a subset thereof.
Additional License Limitations:
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by HERE in a separate
written agreement, and without limiting the
preceding paragraph, your license is
conditioned on use of the Data as prescribed
in this agreement, and you may not (a) use
this Data with any products, systems, or
applications installed or otherwise connected
to or in communication with vehicles capable
of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet management
or similar applications; or (b) with, or in
communication with, including without
limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and
handheld computers, pagers, and personal
digital -assistants or PDAs.
Note: This Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the passage of
time, changing circum-stances, sources used
and the nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic Data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty:
This Data is provided to you “as is”, and you
agree to use it at your own risk. HERE and its
licensors (and their licensors and suppliers)
make no guarantees, representations or
warranties of any kind, express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this Data,
or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error ¬free.
385
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty:
HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability:
HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE
OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY
LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN
CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF HERE OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not allow
certain liability exclusions or damages
limitations, so to that extent the above may
not apply to you.
Export Control:
You agree not to export from anywhere any
part of the Data or any direct product thereof
except in compliance with, and with all
licenses and approvals required under,
applicable export laws, rules and regulations,
including but not limited to the laws, rules
and regulations administered by the Office
of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S.
Department of Commerce and the Bureau
of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement:
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between HERE (and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us
with respect to such subject matter.
Severability:
You and HERE agree that if any portion of
this agreement is found illegal or
unenforceable, that portion shall be severed
and the remainder of the Agreement shall be
given full force and effect.
Severability:
You and HERE agree that if any portion of
this agreement is found illegal or
unenforceable, that portion shall be severed
and the remainder of the Agreement shall be
given full force and effect.
386
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
Governing Law:
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
(for Data for the Americas and/or the Asia
Pacific region) or The Netherlands (for Data
for Europe, the Middle East and Africa),
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
For any and all disputes, claims and actions
arising from or in connection with the Data
(“Claims”), you agree to submit to the
personal jurisdiction of (a) the State of Illinois
for Claims related to Data for the Americas
and/or the Asia Pacific region provided to you
hereunder, and (b) The Netherlands for Data
for Europe, the Middle East and/or Africa
provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users:
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with this End¬ User License
Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered
or otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use”, and be treated in accordance
with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR
(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
NAME:
HERE
CONTRACTOR
(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL
60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in
FAR 2.101
and is subject to the End User License
Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
© 1987-2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents #5,987,525, #6,061,680, #6,154,773,
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6.240,459, #6,330,593 and other patents
issued or pending. Some services supplied
under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
387
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections
set forth herein that are available to
Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from
Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not to
assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or
any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all use
of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote, respectively, reserve all
rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music
file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS
SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT
EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE
FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL
BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
388
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
Vehicle with SYNC only
FCC ID: KMHSG1P1
IC: 1422A-SG1P1
Vehicle with SYNC and MyFord Touch or
MyLincoln Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
389
MKS (), enUSA
Appendices
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A
LINCOLN EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Lincoln Extended Service Plan.
It is the only extended service plan backed
by Lincoln Motor Company, and provides
peace of mind protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Lincoln ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor
– can easily exceed the price of your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan. With Lincoln ESP, you
minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills
and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four Extended Service Plans with
different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over 1000
covered components, this plan is so
complete that we generally only discuss
what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Lincoln and Ford dealers in the
U.S. and Canada. It is the only extended
service plan authorized and backed by
Lincoln Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan coverage expires, you
can transfer any remaining coverage to the
new owner. Whenever you sell your vehicle,
prospective buyers may have a higher degree
of confidence that vehicle was properly
maintained with Lincoln ESP, thereby
improving resale value.
390
MKS (), enUSA
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Lincoln Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and select items
that routinely wear out. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
affording your vehicle maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs (except in California).
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Belts and hoses.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable,
no interest, no fee payment program allowing
you all the security and benefits Lincoln ESP
has to offer while paying over time. You are
pre-approved with no credit checks, no
hassles! To learn more, call our Lincoln ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail
to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Extended Service
Plan. Lincoln Extended Service Plan is the
only service contract backed by Lincoln Motor
Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on
the plan you purchase, Lincoln Extended
Service Plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Lincoln Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is
tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada and the United States, provided by
a network of participating authorized Lincoln
Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Lincoln Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Extended Service Plan that is right
for you.
391
MKS (), enUSA
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous
testing. It is important that you have your
vehicle serviced at the proper times. These
intervals serve two purposes; one is to
maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 290).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the
training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and
Saturday hours to make your service visit
more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services that
are required on your vehicle, from general
maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or
body shops. Please contact your dealer for
details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers).
392
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in the
information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil change
within two weeks or 500 miles (800
kilometers) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See General
Information (page 88).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or 5000
miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10000
miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops these
systems using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should inspect
discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required to
fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
393
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
394
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it
is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
395
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor
or technician about the multi-point vehicle
inspection. It is a comprehensive way to
perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle.
Your checklist gives you immediate feedback
on the overall condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying ENGINE OIL
CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED
in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
396
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings (All-wheel drive vehicles).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
397
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings (All-wheel
drive vehicles).
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 239).
Other maintenance items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
398
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items
1
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
4
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary to
perform the extra maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3000 mi
(4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED
message appearing in the information
display.
• Example 1: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come on,
but the odometer reads 30000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25000 mi
(40,000 km)). Perform the engine air
filter replacement.
399
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.Every 30000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 mi
(96,000 km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 mi
(96,000 km)
400
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 mi
(48,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel.Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle Maintenance
Change the axle fluid anytime an axle is
submerged in water.
401
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's useful
life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges
you to have all recommended maintenance
services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil of
SM or SN quality, the normal oil change
interval is 3000 mi (4,800 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1800 mi (2,900 km).
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and
dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and cabin
air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
402
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
403
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
404
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
405
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
406
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
407
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
408
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
409
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
410
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
411
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
412
MKS (), enUSA
Scheduled Maintenance
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..............................................105
About This Manual................................................7
Protecting the Environment.....................................7
ABS
See: Brakes.................................................................147
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes......................................................................147
Accessories.........................................................373
Exterior style..............................................................373
Interior style...............................................................373
Lifestyle.......................................................................373
Peace of mind...........................................................373
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation......11
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control..................164
Active Park Assist..............................................155
Automatic Steering into Parking Space...........157
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature...............158
Troubleshooting the System...............................158
Using Active Park Assist........................................156
Adaptive Headlamps.........................................75
Adjusting the Headlamps..............................251
Horizontal Aim Adjustment................................252
Vertical Aim Adjustment.......................................251
Adjusting the Pedals.........................................68
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........................65
Easy Entry and Exit Feature...................................65
Memory Feature........................................................65
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps......................................75
Airbag Disposal...................................................44
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..............................................105
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................64
All-Wheel Drive..................................................142
Ambient Lighting.................................................77
Anti-Theft Alarm................................................64
Arming the Alarm......................................................64
Disarming the Alarm................................................64
Appendices.........................................................375
Audible Warnings and Indicators.................86
Headlamps On Warning Chime...........................87
Key in Ignition Warning Chime.............................86
Keyless Warning Alert..............................................87
Parking Brake On Warning Chime.......................87
Audio Control.......................................................65
Seek and Media ........................................................66
Audio System....................................................299
General Information..............................................299
Audio Unit...........................................................300
Autolamps..............................................................71
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps..........72
Automatic Climate Control...........................105
Automatic High Beam Control.......................74
Activating the System..............................................74
Manually Overriding the System..........................75
Automatic Transmission................................139
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning...................................................................141
Brake-Shift Interlock..............................................140
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow.........................................................................141
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission...........139
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission..................................139
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check.......244
6F50/6F55 Transmission....................................244
Autowipers............................................................69
Auxiliary Power Points.....................................123
110 Volt AC Power Point.........................................123
12 Volt DC Power Point...........................................123
Locations.....................................................................123
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive...............................................142
B
Blind Spot Information System....................176
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS™) with
Cross Traffic Alert................................................176
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...............234
Booster Seats........................................................21
Types of Booster Seats............................................22
Brake Fluid Check.............................................247
Brakes.....................................................................147
General Information................................................147
Breaking-In.........................................................204
413
MKS (), enUSA
Index
Bulb Specification Chart................................253
C
Cabin Air Filter....................................................108
California Proposition 65...................................11
Capacities and Specifications....................290
Technical Specifications......................................294
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior....................................257
Center Console...................................................125
Changing a Bulb................................................252
Lamp Assembly Condensation.........................252
Replacing Brake, Tail, Rear Direction Indicator
and Reverse Lamp Bulbs................................253
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If
Equipped).............................................................253
Replacing Front Parking, Direction Indicator
and Sidemarker Bulbs......................................253
Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs........................252
Replacing High-mount Brake Lamp
Bulbs.......................................................................253
Replacing the License Plate Lamp Bulb........253
Changing a Fuse................................................232
Fuses............................................................................232
Changing a Road Wheel................................283
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information...........................................................283
Stowing the flat tire................................................287
Tire Change Procedure.........................................285
Changing the 12V Battery..............................248
Battery Management System (If
Equipped).............................................................250
Changing the Engine Air Filter.....................255
3.5L EcoBoost Engine...........................................255
3.7L Engine.................................................................255
Changing the Wiper Blades.........................250
Checking MyKey System Status....................53
Checking the Wiper Blades..........................250
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance......................................................33
Child Safety............................................................14
General Information..................................................14
Child Safety Locks..............................................25
Left-Hand Side...........................................................26
Right-Hand Side........................................................26
Child Seat Positioning.......................................24
Cleaning Leather Seats.................................260
Cleaning Products............................................257
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.............................261
Cleaning the Engine........................................258
Cleaning the Exterior.......................................257
Exterior Chrome Parts...........................................258
Exterior Plastic Parts.............................................258
Stripes or Graphics.................................................258
Underbody................................................................258
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.............................260
Cleaning the Interior........................................259
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades................................................................259
Clearing All MyKeys.............................................51
Climate................................................................360
Climate Control Voice Commands..................363
Climate Control.................................................105
Climate Controlled Seats................................115
Cooled Seats..............................................................115
Collision Warning System..............................182
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION.................................182
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check.................................240
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator............43
Creating a MyKey.................................................51
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.....................................................................51
Cruise Control......................................................66
Principle of Operation............................................163
Type 1.............................................................................66
Type 2............................................................................66
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control.....................................163
Customer Assistance.......................................212
D
Data Recording.......................................................9
Event Data Recording.................................................9
Service Data Recording.............................................9
Daytime Running Lamps..................................73
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable).............................................73
Type 2 - Configurable...............................................73
Direction Indicators............................................76
Lane Change................................................................76
414
MKS (), enUSA
Index
Drive Control.......................................................185
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL.................................185
Driver Alert.............................................................171
Using Driver Alert.......................................................171
Driver and Passenger Airbags.........................37
Children and Airbags................................................38
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment..............................................................37
Driving Aids...........................................................171
Driving Hints.......................................................204
Driving Through Water...................................204
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...............................73
E
Economical Driving.........................................204
Emission Control System...............................136
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).........................137
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing.....................................................................138
End User License Agreement.......................375
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)....................................................................375
Engine Block Heater.........................................129
Using the Engine Block Heater...........................130
Engine Coolant Check....................................240
Adding Engine Coolant..........................................241
Checking the Engine Coolant..............................241
Recycled Engine Coolant.....................................242
Severe Climates.......................................................242
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling...................................................................242
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System..........................63
Engine Oil Check...............................................239
Adding Engine Oil...................................................240
Engine Oil Dipstick...........................................239
Engine Specifications.....................................290
Drivebelt Routing....................................................290
Entertainment...................................................325
A/V Inputs..................................................................342
AM/FM Radio............................................................327
Bluetooth Audio......................................................342
Browsing Device Content.....................................326
CD..................................................................................337
SD Card Slot and USB Port.................................338
Sirius® Satellite Radio (If Activated)..............333
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information......................................342
Essential Towing Checks..............................200
Before Towing a Trailer..........................................201
Hitches.......................................................................200
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)..............................................201
Safety Chains...........................................................200
Trailer Brakes...........................................................200
Trailer Lamps...........................................................200
When Towing a Trailer...........................................201
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording...................................................9
Export Unique Options......................................13
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................390
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)..................391
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)..............................390
Exterior Mirrors.....................................................79
Auto-Dimming Feature...........................................79
Blind Spot Monitor...................................................80
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.....................................79
Heated Exterior Mirrors............................................79
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors................................79
Memory Mirrors..........................................................79
Power Exterior Mirrors..............................................79
F
Fastening the Safety Belts..............................28
Safety Belt Extension Assembly.........................30
Safety Belt Locking Modes....................................29
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy................28
Floor Mats...........................................................205
415
MKS (), enUSA
Index
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps..............................................75
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals......................................68
Front Fog Lamps.................................................75
Front Passenger Sensing System.................38
Fuel and Refueling.............................................131
Fuel Consumption............................................135
Calculating Fuel Economy...................................136
Filling the Tank..........................................................135
Fuel Filter.............................................................248
Fuel Quality..........................................................132
Choosing the Right Fuel........................................132
Octane Recommendations..................................132
Fuel Shutoff.......................................................208
Fuses......................................................................218
Fuse Specification Chart................................218
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.............226
Power Distribution Box..........................................218
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener..................119
Gauges....................................................................83
General Information on Radio
Frequencies........................................................45
Intelligent Access......................................................45
General Maintenance Information............392
Multi-Point Inspection..........................................395
Owner Checks and Services...............................393
Protecting Your Investment................................392
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?...............................392
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?..........................................................392
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada...............................................................215
Getting the Services You Need.....................212
Away From Home....................................................212
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake..................................................148
Hazard Warning Flashers..............................208
Headlamp Exit Delay.........................................73
Head Restraints.................................................109
Adjusting the Head Restraint...............................110
Tilting Head Restraints ...........................................111
Heated Steering Wheel.....................................67
Heated Windows and Mirrors.......................107
Heated Exterior Mirror............................................107
Heated Rear Window.............................................107
Heating
See: Climate Control..............................................105
Hill Start Assist..................................................148
Switching the System On and Off....................149
Using Hill Start Assist............................................148
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..............................................................106
Cooling the Interior Quickly..................................107
General Hints............................................................106
Heating the Interior Quickly..................................107
Recommended Settings for Cooling ...............107
Recommended Settings for Heating................107
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather..................................................................107
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..................................................................147
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...............234
I
In California (U.S. Only)..................................213
Information Display Control............................67
Cluster Display Control Features.........................67
Information Displays.........................................88
General Information.................................................88
Information..........................................................351
911 Assist.....................................................................357
Alerts............................................................................357
Calendar.....................................................................357
Sirius Travel Link......................................................355
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States
Only).......................................................................352
Vehicle Health Report...........................................359
416
MKS (), enUSA
Index
Information Messages......................................94
Adaptive Cruise Control..........................................95
AdvanceTrac™...........................................................95
Alarm.............................................................................95
Automatic Engine Shutdown...............................96
AWD...............................................................................96
Battery and Charging System...............................97
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert
System......................................................................97
Brake System..............................................................98
Collision Warning System......................................98
Doors and Locks........................................................99
Fuel.................................................................................99
Keys and Intelligent Access...................................99
Lane Keeping System............................................100
Maintenance...............................................................101
MyKey............................................................................101
Park Aid.......................................................................102
Power Steering.........................................................103
Seats.............................................................................103
Tire Pressure Monitoring System......................104
Transmission.............................................................104
Installing Child Seats..........................................16
Child Seats....................................................................16
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts...............................16
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH)....................................................................19
Using Tether Straps..................................................20
Instrument Cluster.............................................83
Instrument Lighting Dimmer...........................72
Interior Lamps......................................................76
Front Row Map Lamps............................................76
Second Row Map Lamps........................................77
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release.................................................................61
Interior Mirror.......................................................80
Auto-Dimming Mirror................................................81
Introduction.............................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle............................209
Connecting the Jumper Cables.........................209
Jump Starting............................................................210
Preparing Your Vehicle.........................................209
Removing the Jumper Cables.............................210
K
Keyless Entry........................................................59
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD....................................................................59
Keyless Starting.................................................126
Ignition Modes...........................................................126
Keys and Remote Controls.............................45
L
Lane Keeping System.......................................172
Switching the System On and Off.....................172
Lighting Control....................................................71
Headlamp Flasher......................................................71
High Beams...................................................................71
Lighting.....................................................................71
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services........11
Load Carrying......................................................187
Load Limit.............................................................187
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles...................................................................197
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.......................................................................187
Locking and Unlocking.....................................56
Activating Intelligent Access ................................56
Autolock Feature (If Enabled)..............................57
Battery Saver..............................................................58
Illuminated Entry.......................................................58
Illuminated Exit..........................................................58
Luggage Compartment Release.........................58
Power Door Locks.....................................................56
Remote Control.........................................................56
Smart Unlocks ...........................................................57
Locks.......................................................................56
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.............................283
M
Maintenance......................................................234
General Information...............................................234
Media Hub...........................................................302
417
MKS (), enUSA
Index
Memory Function...............................................114
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..................................115
Linking a Preset Position to Your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key...................114
Saving a Preset Position.........................................114
Message Center
See: Information Displays......................................88
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors....................107
See: Windows and Mirrors.....................................78
Mobile Communications Equipment...........12
Moonroof................................................................81
Bounce-Back..............................................................82
Opening and Closing the Moonroof...................82
Opening and Closing the Sunscreen.................82
Venting the Moonroof..............................................82
Motorcraft Parts................................................291
MyKey Troubleshooting....................................54
MyKey™.................................................................50
Principle of Operation.............................................50
MyLincoln Touch™..........................................303
General Information..............................................303
N
Navigation...........................................................364
cityseekr.....................................................................366
Map Mode.................................................................368
Navigation Map Updates.......................................371
Navigation Voice Commands..............................371
Point of Interest (POI) Categories....................365
Quick-touch Buttons.............................................370
Setting a Destination............................................364
Setting Your Navigation Preferences...............367
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...............396
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®..............................396
Maintenance Intervals...........................................397
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset...........................240
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check...........................................239
Opening and Closing the Hood...................234
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature...........................................................216
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual................216
Overhead Console.............................................125
P
Parking Aid...........................................................153
Front Sensing System............................................154
Rear Sensing System..............................................153
Parking Aids.........................................................153
Parking Brake......................................................148
Passive Anti-Theft System.............................63
SecuriLock....................................................................63
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System..........................63
Pedals.....................................................................68
Perchlorate..............................................................11
Personal Safety System™...............................35
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?........................................................................35
Phone...................................................................344
Making Calls.............................................................346
Pairing Subsequent Phones...............................346
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time.............345
Phone Menu Options.............................................347
Phone Settings........................................................348
Phone Voice Commands.....................................349
Receiving Calls.........................................................346
Text Messaging........................................................347
Post-Crash Alert System.................................211
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..................................56
Power Seats..........................................................111
Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion
(If Equipped)..........................................................113
Power Lumbar............................................................113
Power Steering Fluid Check..........................247
418
MKS (), enUSA
Index
Power Windows...................................................78
Accessory Delay.........................................................79
Bounce-Back...............................................................78
Global Opening..........................................................78
One-Touch Down......................................................78
One-Touch Up............................................................78
Window Lock...............................................................79
R
Rear Seat Armrest..............................................117
Armrest pass-through.............................................117
Rear View Camera............................................160
Using the Rear View Camera System..............160
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera........................................160
Recommended Towing Weights.................199
Refueling...............................................................134
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System.....................134
Remote Control...................................................46
Car Finder......................................................................47
Intelligent Access Key..............................................46
Remote Start...............................................................47
Replacing the Battery..............................................46
Sounding a Panic Alarm..........................................47
Remote Start......................................................108
Automatic Settings................................................108
Repairing Minor Paint Damage....................261
Replacement Parts Recommendation.........11
Collision Repairs..........................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs........................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts..........................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.................................................................48
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)....................................................................217
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)........217
Roadside Assistance.......................................207
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.............................................................207
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance............................................................208
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance.........................................207
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance.........................................207
Roadside Emergencies...................................207
Running-In
See: Breaking-In......................................................204
Running Out of Fuel..........................................132
Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container.........133
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.....................30
Safety Belt Minder..............................................32
Belt-Minder™..............................................................32
Safety Belts...........................................................27
Principle of Operation..............................................27
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime....................................................................31
Conditions of operation...........................................31
Safety Canopy™..................................................41
Safety Precautions.............................................131
Scheduled Maintenance Record................402
Scheduled Maintenance...............................392
Seats......................................................................109
Security...................................................................63
Settings.................................................................313
Clock.............................................................................314
Display..........................................................................314
Settings.......................................................................316
Sound...........................................................................315
Vehicle..........................................................................315
Side Airbags.........................................................40
Sitting in the Correct Position......................109
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.......................................279
Special Notices.....................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty..............................12
Special Instructions...................................................12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...................................................399
Exceptions..................................................................401
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control..................................................163
Stability Control..................................................151
Principle of Operation.............................................151
419
MKS (), enUSA
Index
Starting a Gasoline Engine.............................127
Automatic Engine Shutdown..............................128
Failure to Start..........................................................128
Fast Restart................................................................127
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.....................129
Important Ventilating Information....................129
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving.....................................................................129
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..............................................................128
Starting and Stopping the Engine..............126
General Information...............................................126
Steering..................................................................181
Electric Power Steering..........................................181
Steering Wheel....................................................65
Storage Compartments..................................125
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.............................................................81
Sun Shades............................................................81
Sun Visors...............................................................81
Illuminated Vanity Mirror.........................................81
Supplementary Restraints System..............36
Principle of Operation..............................................36
Symbols Glossary..................................................7
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications.................290
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).............................214
Tire Care..............................................................264
Glossary of Tire Terminology..............................265
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..................................................................264
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall................................................................266
Temperature A B C.................................................265
Traction AA A B C....................................................265
Treadwear..................................................................264
Tire Pressure Monitoring System................279
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System...................................................................280
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System ...................................................................281
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires..........................................264
Towing a Trailer..................................................198
Load Placement......................................................198
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels..........202
Emergency Towing.................................................202
Recreational Towing..............................................203
Towing...................................................................198
Traction Control.................................................150
Principle of Operation............................................150
Transmission Code Designation.................293
Transmission.......................................................139
Transmission
See: Transmission...................................................139
Transporting the Vehicle...............................202
U
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™......................................................236
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L........................238
Engine Shield............................................................239
Universal Garage Door Opener.....................119
HomeLink Wireless Control System..................119
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.....................164
Blocked Sensor........................................................169
Changing the Set Speed.......................................167
Detection Issues......................................................168
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control..............166
Following a Vehicle.................................................165
Hilly Condition Usage.............................................167
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation.................167
Overriding Adaptive Cruise Control...................167
Resuming the Set Speed.......................................167
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control........................164
Setting a Speed........................................................164
Setting the Gap Distance.....................................165
Switching the System Off.....................................167
Switching to Normal Cruise Control.................170
Using All-Wheel Drive......................................142
Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel
Drive (AWD)..........................................................142
Using Cruise Control........................................163
Switching Cruise Control Off...............................163
Switching Cruise Control On...............................163
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...............................................................54
Using Snow Chains..........................................279
420
MKS (), enUSA
Index
Using Stability Control....................................152
AdvanceTrac® ..........................................................152
Using Traction Control....................................150
Switching the System Off Using a
Switch.....................................................................150
Switching the System Off Using the
Information Display Controls.........................150
System Indicator Lights and Messages..........150
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).................................................215
V
Vehicle Care........................................................257
General Information...............................................257
Vehicle Certification Label............................292
Vehicle Identification Number......................291
Vehicle Storage.................................................262
Battery.........................................................................263
Body.............................................................................262
Brakes..........................................................................263
Cooling system........................................................262
Engine..........................................................................262
Fuel system...............................................................262
General.......................................................................262
Miscellaneous..........................................................263
Removing Vehicle From Storage.......................263
Tires..............................................................................263
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..............................................105
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number..................291
Voice Control........................................................66
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.....................84
Adaptive Cruise Control..........................................84
Anti-Lock Braking System.....................................84
Battery...........................................................................84
Brake System..............................................................84
Cruise Control.............................................................84
Direction Indicator....................................................84
Door Ajar.......................................................................84
Engine Coolant Temperature...............................85
Engine Oil.....................................................................85
Fasten Safety Belt.....................................................85
Front Airbag.................................................................85
Front Fog Lamps.......................................................85
Grade Assist................................................................85
Heads Up Display......................................................85
High Beam...................................................................85
Low Fuel Level............................................................85
Low Tire Pressure Warning....................................85
Low Washer Fluid......................................................85
Parking Lamps...........................................................86
Powertrain Fault........................................................86
Service Engine Soon................................................86
Stability Control.........................................................86
Stability Control Off.................................................86
Washer Fluid Check.........................................248
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior....................................257
See: Wipers and Washers......................................69
Waxing..................................................................258
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.............................283
Wheels and Tires.............................................264
Technical Specifications......................................288
Windows and Mirrors.........................................78
Windshield Washers..........................................70
Windshield Wipers.............................................69
Wipers and Washers.........................................69
421
MKS (), enUSA
Index
